015-jh-1903

163
þ * ú )+ Clíent E pÀtron \Þñi  Bv/ evision rÆít:::-tlÞì ate ev -.-:- ssuED FoR tNV|TATTON Tg¡lR_  MAR 93 ISSUED AS KOC ENG GROUP SPEC 5 SEP 94 @ (dJ. Ê. U¡) .:*¿35J1 L ' ãS-;É KUWAIT OIL COMPANY (K.S.C.} Engineering Group Specification Nymher 6-JH-1903 General lnstruments

Upload: mihal

Post on 24-Feb-2018

213 views

Category:

Documents


0 download

TRANSCRIPT

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 1/163

þ

*

ú

)+

Clíent

E

pÀtron

\Þñi

  Bv/

evision

rÆít:::-tlÞì

ate

ev

-.-:-

ssuED

FoR

tNV|TATTON

Tg¡lR_

 MAR

93

ISSUED

AS

KOC

ENG

GROUP

SPEC

5

SEP

94

@

(dJ.

Ê.

U¡)

.:*¿35J1

L '

ãS-;É

KUWAIT

OIL

COMPANY

(K.S.C.}

Engineering

Group

Specification

Nymher

6-JH-1903

General

lnstruments

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 2/163

CONTENTS

1.O

2.O

SCOPE

STANDARD

SPECIF¡CATIONS

3.0

SEBVICE

CONDITIONS

6

6

7

7

I

3.1

ExternalConditions

3.2

Sulphide

Stress

Cracking

Considerations

. .

4.O

BASIC ENG¡NEERING

INFORMATION

4.1 Hazardous

Area

.

4.2

Explosive Hazard

Protection

Methods

4.3

Protection

from

the

Environment

4.4

Utilities

I

I

II

I

I

10

11

12

12

13

13

14

14

4.5

Measurements

and Scales

4.6

Connection Sizes and

Type

.

.

. .

lnstrument

ldentification

. .

Limitations on

Selection and Approved

Manufacturers

List

.

.

Line

Break Detection

Use

of

Barrier

Glands

Shop

lnspection

and

Testing

Painting and Protective

Finishing

Packing, Marking and

Documentation

.

.

.

.

Spare

Parts

and

Maintenance

Requirements

5.0

CONTROL

VALVES

Applicable Standards

4.7

4.8

Scope

of

Control

Valve

Selection

Valve Types

Valve Sízing Requirements

Trim

Select¡on

.

Valve

Design

Requirements

. .

Actuator

Selection

and

Sizing

11

12

13

14

6.0

RELIEF

AND

SAFETY

VALVES

6.1

Applicable

Standards

6.2

Scope

of Relíef

Valve Section

Relief

Applications

and

Selection

Sizing

Requirements

. .

Design,

Materials

and

Construction

Noise

4.9

4.10

4.11

4.12

4.13

4.14

1

2

3

4

5

b

7

I

I

10

1

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

16

19

21

23

26

30

32

33

35

38

43

45

46

46

46

47

50

52

55

Actualor

Construction

Noise,

Flashing

and

Cavitation

Construction

Requirements

lnstallation

Notes,

Bypass

and Handwheel Philosophy

.

.

Accessories

and

Ancillary

ltems

.

.

Performance

Req

uirements

Nameplate

Data

.

.

6.3

6.4

6.5

6.6

Sheet

2 of

163

Data

15-9-94

Rev

pecificarion

Number

01s-JH-1903

@l0l';{*,w:-*

N1

2-0056

ir

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 3/163

lnstallation

Notes

.

Performance

Requirements

Nameplate

Data

7.O

FLOW

MEASUREMENT

7.1

ApplicableStandards

7.2

Scope

of

Flow

Measurement

Section

7.3

Flow lnstrument

Types

and

Selection

. .

.

7.4

Sizing

and

ents

.

7.5

Constructi

7.6

lnstallation

Notes

7.7

PerformanceReguirements

7.8

NameplateData....

8.O

PRESSURE

MEI\SUREMENT

6.7

6.8

6.9

.55

.55

.57

58

58

58

58

62

64

68

71

72

8.3

Pressure

lnstruments

Type

and

Selection

8.4

Sizing

and Ranging

Requirements

8.5

Design

and

Constfuction

8.6

lnstallation

Notes .

.

. .

8.7

PerformanceRequirements

8.8

Nameplate

Data

.

9.O

TEMPERATURE

TüEASUREMENT

9.1

Applicable

Codes

9.2

Scope

of

Temperature Measurement

Section

. .

.

.

9.3

Temperature

lnstrument

Types

and

Selection

9.4

Sizing and

Ranging

Requirements

Construction

Requirements

lnstallation

Notes

.

.

Performance Fìequirements

Nameplate

Data

1O.O

LEVEL

MEASUREMENT

1O.1

Applicable

Standards

1O.2

Scope of

Level

Measurement

Section .

. .

10.3

Level

lnstrument

Type and

Sefection

10.4

Sizing and

Ranging

Requirements

.

.

10.5

Construction

Requirements

10.6

lnstallation

Notes

1O.7

Performance

Requirements

1O.B

Nameplate

Data

.

11.0

TANK

METERING

1

1.1

Applicable

Standards

9.5

9.6

9.7

9.8

8.1

8.2

11.2

11,3

11.4

Applicable

Standards

Scope

of

Pressure

Measurement

Section

. .

. .

Scope

of Tank

Metering

Section

Tank Metering

lnstruments

Type

and Selectíon

Sizing and

Ranging

Requirements

.

1

1,5

Construction

Requirements

72

72

72

73

7A

76

81

a2

83

83

83

83

83

85

86

91

91

92

93

93

93

93

97

99

106

106

108

108

108

108

109

110

112

Sheet

3

of

163

Date

1

5-9-94

Rev

pecification

Numbe¡

01s-JH-1903

@l0liJl,t:# ;x:'*'

{y

Nl

2-0056

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 4/163

lnstallation

Notes

Performance

Requ

irernents

Nameplate

Data

12.0 LOCAL

PNEUMATIC

CONTROLLERS

12.1

Scope

of

Local

Controller

Specification

12.2

Pneumatic

Controller

Types

and

Selection

.

.

12,3

Sizing

and

Ranging Requirements

12.4

Design

and

Construction

lnstallation

Notes

Performance

Requirements

Nameplate

Data

6

7

I

11

11

11

112

113

115

115

115

115

117

117

118

118

119

119

119

119

120

120

121

121

122

2.5

2.6

2.7

1

1

1

13.0

SPEED

MEASUREMENT

13.1

Scope

of

Speed

Measurement Section

13.2

Speed

Measurement

lnstruments

Type

and

Selection

13.3

Sizing and

Ranging Requirements

13.4

Construction

Requirements

13.5

lnstallation

Notes

13.6

Performance

Requirements

13.7 Nameplate

Data

14.O

VIBRATION

SENSING

14.1

Scope

of

Vibration

Sensing

Section

14.2

Vibration

Sensing

lnstruments

Type

and

Selection

14.3

Sizing

and

Ranging

Requirements

.

.

14.4

Construction Requirements

.

.

14.5

lnstallation

Notes

1

4.6

Performance

Requirements

14.7

Nameplate Data

15.0

SOLENOID

VALVES

122

122

122

123

123

123

123

124

124

124

124

125

126

126

128

128

129

15.1

15.2

15.3

Applicable

Standards

Scope

of

Solenoid

Valve Section

Solenoid

Valves

Types

and

Selection

Construction

Requirements

.

.

.

.

lnstallation

Notes

Performance

Req

uirements

Nameplate

Data

15.4

Sizing

and Ranging

Requirements

5.5

5.6

5.7

5.8

1

1

1

1

16.0

SIGNAL

CONVERTORS

16.1

Scope

of

Signal

Converter

Section

16.2

Signal Converters

Type

and

Selection

.

16.3

Sizing

Requirements

16.4

Construction

Requirements

.

. .

lnstallation

Notes

Performance

Requirements

Nameplate

Data

16.5

16.6

16.7

129

129

129

130

130

131

132

133

Sheet

4of

163

Date

15-9-94

Rsv

pecification

Number

01s-JH-1903

@l0l ;:mx^Group

(t

N12-OOs6

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 5/163

17.0

POSTT|ON

SWTTCHES

133

133

133

134

134

134

135

135

17.1

Scope

of

Position

Switches

Section

17.2

Position

Switches

Type

and Selection

17.3

System

Requirements

. .

.

17.4

Construction

Requirements

17.5

lnstallation

Notes

17.6

Performance Requirements

17.7

Nameplate

Data

.

18.O

FLAME DETECTION

135

135

135

137

137

138

138

139

18.1

Scope

of

Flame

Detection

System

18.2

Flame

Detection

Types

and Selection

18.3

System

Requirements

18.4

Construction

Requirements

18.5

lnstallat¡on

Notes

18.6 Performance

Requirements

18.7

Nameplate

Data

.

19.O

MISCELLANEOUS INSTRUMENTS

139

139

139

140

140

140

141

141

142

19.1

Applicable

Standards

. .

.

19.2

Scope

of

Miscellaneous

lnstrument

Section

19.3

Selection

t,

q

19.4

Sizing

and Ranging

Requirements

1

1

1

1

9.5

9.6

9.7

9.8

Construction

Requirements

lnstallation

Notes

. .

.

.

Performance

Requirements

NameplateData....

20.O

ANALYSERS

142

142

142

142

143

143

155

155

156

2Q.1

Applicable

Standards

2O.2

Scope

of

Analysers

Section

20.3 Analyzer

Types

and

Selection

20.4

Sizing and

Ranging

Requirements

20.5 Construction

Requirements

. .

..

20.6 lnstallation

Notes

20.7

Performance

Requirements

20.8

Nameplate

Data

21.O

LOCAL PANELS

ANT}

GAUGE

BOARDS

157

157

157

158

158

161

162

163

21.1

21.2

21.3

21.4

21.5

21.6

21.7

Scope

of

Local

Panel

and

Gauge Board

Selection

Local

Panels

and

Gauge

Boards

Type

and Selection

Sizing

Requirements

Construction

Requirements

. .

.

lnstallation

Notes

Performance

Requirements

Nameplate

Data

Sheet

5

ol 163

Dats

1

5-9-94

Rev

pacification

Number

015-JH-t

903

@l0l,Y, m,G raup

il

N12-0056

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 6/163

û

TË,1,

\\\

1.O

SCOPE

1.1

This specification

details

the

design, manufacture,

¡nspection,

testing

and

supply

of

plant

instrumentation

for

installation

at the

Facility

in Kuwait.

1,2

The

plant

instrumentation

shall

fully

comply

wíth

all

relevant

contractual

requirements

specified

in

the

Scope

of Work

and

Technical

Specification

of

the

contract.

1,3

The

provisions

of

this

specification

shall

appty to

all major

and

ancillary

plant,

proprietary

equipment

and

packaged

units

unless

otherwise

agreed

to

¡n wr¡ting

by the

company.

2.A

STANDARD

SPECIFICATIONS

2.1

lnstruments,

systems

and

equipment

shall

conform in

design,

materials

and

performance,

except

where

otherwise

specified,

wíth

the current

issue

and

amendments

of

the

applicable

codes

and

standards

prevailing

on

the

effective

date of

the Contract:

2.1.1

lnternationalStandards

NACE

MRO175

Material

Requirements

-

Sulphide

Cracking

Resistant

Material

Íor

Equipment

Stress

Oiffield

2.1.2

Brit¡sh

Standards

BS

5345

Code

of

Practice

for

the

Selection,

lnstallation

and

Maintenance

of

Electrical

Equipment

for

Use

in

Potentially

Explosive

Atmospheres

BS

5490

Specification

for

Classificatíon

of

Degrees

of

Protection

provided

by Enclosures

BS

5501

ElecÍical

Apparatus

for

Potentially

Explosive

Atmospheres

(Also

CENELEC

Std

EnEO.Ot4-

O2O

and

029)

2.1.3

Engineering

Group

Specifications

All

equipment

and

accessories

covered by

this

specificatíon

shall

comply

with

all

relevant

Engineering

Group

specifications

of

which

the

following

are

specifically

referenced

in

this

specification:

015-AH-10O1

Basic

Design

Criteria

01

5-AH-1002

lnternational

Codes

Shoet

6of

163

Oate

15-9-94

Hev

pecificatíon

Number

01s-JH-1903

@KÏlTJn:iJx,Group

L/

fr

Nl

2-0056

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 7/163

t',

J>

*-

ú

3.0

015-JH-1901

lnstrumentEngineeringBasicData

01

5-JH-1902

lnstrumenr

Design

015-JH-1905

Emergency

Shutdown

panel

015-JH-1907

Motor-OperatedVatves

015-JH-19O8

lnstrumentlnstallation

O1s-JH-1909

lnstrumentationforpackageEquipment

01s-KH-1902

spare

parts

and

Maintenance

Requirements

O15-NH-1

104

Plant/Equipment

Noise

Control

01s-PH-1901

Erectrical

Design,

rnstailation

and

resting

O1s-XH-1005

Shop

and Field

painting

015-UH-10O1

packing,MarkingandDocumentation

2.2

A

non-inclusive

listing

of applicable

codes

and

standards

shall

be

found

in

the

Engineering

Group

Specification

ent¡tled lnstrument

Engineering

Basic

Data

{Number

01

5-JH-1

901

}.

2.g

Specifically

applicable

codes are

found

at

the

beginning

of

each

section

of

this specification.

2.4 Compliance

with

this

specification

shall

not

relieve

the

Contractor

of

its

responsibility

to

supply

equipment

suited

to

meet

the specified

service

conditions

and

applicable

regulatÍons.

2.5 Where

conflícts

exist

between

this

specificatíon

and

other

Ðrawings,

standards,

codes and

specifications.

the

most

stringent

shall

be

applied.

SERVICE

CONDITIONS

3.1

ExternalConditions

3.1 .1 The

equipment

shall

be

suitable

for continuous

operation

at

a

desert locatÍon

under

high

ambient

temperatures

and

humidity.

The

atmosphere

at

the

Facility

is

generally

dusty

and

corrosive

and may

contain

traces

of

hydrogen

sulphide.

3.1.2

Plant

instrumentation

shall in

all respects

be

suitable

for

continuous

operatíon

in

the

service

conditions

stated

in

the

Engineering

Group

specification

entitled

Basic

Design

criteria

{Number

ol

s,AH-

1001).

Sheet

7 of

163

Dats

15-9-94

Rev

peciflcatíon

Number

01

5-JH-1 SO3

@llw,tw&,**

tr

 1

2-0056

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 8/163

X

,Þ'

*

ó

o

ú

3.2

Sulnhide

Slfejis

Cracking

Conqiderationq

3.2.1

The

flow

sheet

for

materials

selection guidance

issued

with

the

Contract

documents

shall

indícate

where the level

of

HrS

present

in

the

process

fluid can

be above

the

partial

pressure

level indicated

as

critical

within

NACE

MRO175.

Where

such

conditions

are

indicated,

the

Contractor

shall

supply

equipment

using

materials,

manufacturing

methods

and

testing

within

the

NACE

specification.

3.2.2

The

requirements

shall

apply

to all

components

that

can

come

into

contact

with

the

process

fluid,

including

remote

mounted

instruments and

impulse

lines.

3.2.3

When

any

part

of

the

plant

falls

within

the

requiremenr

for

materials

to

be specífied and fabricated

in

accordance

with

the

NACE code,

¡t

¡s

deemed

that

the

HrS content

in

the

general

atmosphere

over

the whole

plant

precludes

the

use of

brass

and

copper

for

pressure

parts

such

as lnstrument

air tube

and

fittings.

ln

thís

case,

stainless

steel

grade

316

tube

and

double-ferrule

fittings shall

be

used

throughout.

4.4

BASIC

ENGINEERING INFOBMATION

4.1 Hazardous

Areq

General information

on

allocation

of

hazardous

area

divisions

and

responsibilities

are stated

in the

Engineering

Group Specification

entitled

 lnstrument

Engineering

Basic

Data

(Number

O1S-JH-1

gOl).

Contractor

shall be responsible

for confirmation

of

suitable

selections

of

hazardous

area

and

of

protective

execut¡on

methods

to ensure

the safety

of

the

complete

Facility.

4.2

Explosive

Hazard

Prgtection

Merhods

4.2.1

All

field instruments

having

electrical

or

electronic

connections

shall

be suitable for installation

in

the defined

hazardous

area.

The

general

methods

of

protection

are

as

follows:

4.?.2

Alternative

systems

such

as

Ex'p'

{pressurization)or

Ex

,s'

(special

cert¡f¡cationl

shall

be

subject

to wrirten

Company

approval.

Ex'i'a

or

b

Ex'd'

Ex'e'

(junction

boxes)

Ex's'

Ex

Ex

i'a

d'

or b

f¡'g'

(Junction

boxes)

Ex's'

Ex'i'a

Zone

2 Areas

one

1

Areas

ona

O

Areas

Sheet

I of

163

Date

15-9-94

Rev

pecification

Number

01s-JH-1903

@ït|Jßi##,G'¡ouP

d,

N12-0056

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 9/163

4.3

4.2,3

The

preferred

priority

for

the

protection

methods

are

given

in

the

Engineering

Group

specification

entitred

rnstrument

Design,,

(Number

015-JH-1902).

4'2.4

All

equipment

shail

be

certified

for

the

appropriate

area

classificatiof,,

gËrs

group

and

temperature

class

by a'recognized

European

te-s-ring

authority

to

BS

SSO1

(CENELEC

StJndard

En5O.014-O2O

and

O3g),

or

equivatent.

4'2.5

components

of

systems

protected

by

contror

room-mounted

intrinsically

safe

(lS)

isolators

shall

be

ceri¡f¡ed

individuaily

and

shall

be

checked

by

the

contractor

as

a system

including

the

field

instrument,

the

cable

and

the

isolator.

4.2.6

Field instruments

protected

by

an

ls

isolator

do not

require

a

certif

icate

provided

that

a

documented

staternent

f rorn

the

Approved

Manufacturer

is

included

to

confirm

that

the

instrument

may

be

used

as

sirnple

apparatus

in

an lS

circuit

in

accordance

with

BS

S34b.

Protection

from

the

Environment

4.3.1

The

minimum

acceptable

standard

of

protectÍon

against

water

or

dust

ingress

is

to

BS

S49O

(lEC

S29)

degree

of

protectíon

tp

6b.

4-3.2

Electronic

parts

shall

be

environmentally

sealed

or

designed

to

operate

without

change

of

atmosphere (breathing).

4'3'3

Sun

shields

are required

for

all

instruments

for

protection

from

the

direct

sun.

Additional

cooling

måy

be

requírèd

to

ma¡ntain

the

instrument

below

7O C

{165 F}

or

the

max¡mum

Ínstrument

design

ternperatufe,

whichever

is

the lower.

The

contractor

is

responsíb-le

for

providing

such

cooring

either

within

the instrument

design

or

as

a

desÍgn

feature

íncluded

in

the

installation

of

the

instrumãnt.

4.4

Ur¡t¡t¡es

4.5

The

available

utirities

and

their

process

conditions

are

detailed

in

the

EngineeringGroup

Specification entitled lnstrument

Engineeríng

Basic

Data,'

(Number

01s-JH-1901).

Measutqmgnts

and

Scales

The

selected

units

for

calculations

and

scales

are

listed

in

the

Engineering

Group

specification

ent¡tled lnstrument

EngÍneering

Basíc

Data,,

(Number

015-JH-1901).

Sheer

9

of

163

Date

15-9-94

Rev

pecification

Number

01s-JH-1903

@lÏßgHyx,Group

,/'

N 1

2-00s6

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 10/163

TË,t

4.6

Connection

SiF-es

and

Tyoe_

4.6.1

Electrical

All

electrícal

entríes

shall

be

ISO

metric

threaded.

The

preferred

s¡ze is

M2O

x 1.5

mm,

4.6.2 Process

where connection

details

are

given,

it

is

not

âcceptable

for

an

adaptor

to

be

provided

to

meet

this

reguirement,

excepl by

indívídual

Company

agreement.

a

Process connections

for

impulse

tubing shall

be

1/2-in

NpT

female.

b. Process

pipeline

connections

for

therrnowells

shall

be:

1.

Forpípelines

1-1l2-in.

franged,

rared at

30o

fbs.(mínimum).

2.

For

vessels

lbs.(minimum).

2-in.(minimum)

flanged,

rated

30O

c

The flange

rating

shall

increase

to rnatch

the

pipe/vessel

rating

as

necessary.

The

connection

size may

be

increased

if

thermowell stress/vortex-shedding calculations

dictate.

The

gasket

type

and

face

finish

shail

match

the

line

specification.

Atmospheric

pressure

and

cooling

water

applications

rnay

use

NPT

screwed

thermowells.

Pneumatic

l¡nstrument air)

connect¡ons

shall

be

1/4-in.

NpT

unless

air flow requirements

dictate

a

larger

síze. tnstrument

air

tubing/connections

supplíed

as

part

of

the instrument

items

shall

conform

to the

instrument

a¡r hook-up

detaíls

given

in

the Engineering

Group specification

entitled

lnstrument

lnstallation

(Number

0l E-JH-1

g0g).

d.

Level

instrument

chambers

shall

be flanged,

minimum

rating

30o

lbs.

The

flange

rating

shalr

be

increased

to

match

the

vessel rating

as

necessary.

The

gasket

type

and

face

finish

shall match

the

line

specification.

connections

may

be direct

to

the

vesselfor

each

instrument,

but

stand

pipes

shall

be

used

to

avoid

unnecessary

vessel

penetratíons

when

their

use

does

not

impede

on

access,

walkway

clearance

etc.

Ranges

of

instruments

shall

not

be

compromised

to suit

ínstallat¡on

on

stand

pipes.

shutdown

instruments

shall

have

dedicated

vessel

nozzles.

Sheet

10 of 163

Date

1

5-9-94

ßev

pecification

Numbe¡

01s-JH-1903

@¡í0|',,;:sxx^G¡oup

r/'

N

I 2-OOs6

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 11/163

f)

z.

Jb

*

ú

Control

valves

shall be

flanged

and

faced

according

to the

piping

line

classification,

with

a

minimum

rating

of

3OO

lbs. For

fully

welded

lines, individual

proposals

shall

be

submitted to

the

Company for

approval.

f.

Where

possible,

analysis

instruments

shall use

connections as

for

other

instrurnents.

Exceptions

shall

be

submitted

to the

Company

for approval.

g.

Where multiple

shutdown

instruments

are installed

for 2 out of

3 voting,

each

shall

have

a

dedicated

tapping

into

the

process

piping

or

vessel.

4.7

¡nstrument ldentifÌcation

All instrument

¡tems

shall

be

perrnanently

and clearly marked

for

the

following

categories:

4.7.1

Nameplate

Each item

shall be identified

with

a

permanently

fastened

stainless

steel

or

rust-res¡stant

mater¡al

nameplate

comprising:

e

4.7.2

a.

Manufacturers

name.

b. Model number.

c. Serial

number

d.

'

Temperature

and

Pressure

Rating

Of

Wetted

Parts.

e.

*

Voltage

and

Switch

Fating.

f

.

'

Set

Point, Range/Calibration

and

Other

Relevant

Data.

g.

lnstrument

Tag

No.

{Separate

Tag

Plate

Preferred}.

(*

=

where

applicable)

Certification

Plate

(For

Certified

ltems)

Each

certified instrument

shall

have

a certification

plate

giving

as

a

minimum:

a. Type

of

approval

and

mark

of

certifying

body.

b.

Certifying

authority name.

c.

License/certificate number

and

d

Shaet

11

of

163

Date

15-9-94

Rev

pecifícation

Number

01

s-JH-1903

@lïligHlx, -*

fl

 

1 2-0056

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 12/163

4.7.3

d,

Area

classification,

gas

group,

temperature

rating.

Tag

Plate

Each

instrument

having

a

tag

number

on

the

p&lD

shall be

provided

w¡th

a

stainless

steel

tag

plate

with

the

full

atphanumeric

tag

number

hard

metal

stamped

or

deep

engraved.

The

minimum

dimensions

shall

be

40

mm

x

2s

mrn

x

1.b

mm

(1

in.

x I in.

x

1116 in.)

with

a 2-mm

t1/1O-in.) hole

driiled

In

one

corner.

The

tag

shall

be

fastened

to

the

instrument

with

staínless

steel

wire

of

minimum

1

.O-mm

11 låO-in.l

diameter.

Notet

A

tag

plate

integral

with

the

Approved

Manufacturer,s

nameplate

is

acceptable provided the tagging

is

large, clear

and

easily

read

in

the

final

installed

position.

4.7.4

Equipment

and

Site

Number

Tag

plate

Each

instrurnent

shall

be

allocated

by

the

company

an

Equipment

ldentificatíon

Number

(ElN)

and

a

Site

Number

(SN).

The

Contracror

shall

manufacture

and

fit

tag

plates

bearing

the

allocated

numbers

to

each

instrument.

The

minimum

dimensions

shall

be

as

those

above.

4.8

Limitatigns

on

selectiqn

and

Aooroved

Manufacturers

List

4.8.1

All

instruments

and

instrument

items

shall

be

of

heavy

duty

industrial

type

and

be

suitable

for

use

in

the

stated

environment.

4.8.2

Tried

and

tested

equipment

shall

be

used.

Equipment

approaching

obsolescence

shall

be

avoided.

4.8.3

Aluminium

and

aluminium

alloys

are not

permitted

except

with

company

approval.

where

use

of

such

alloys

cannot

be

avoided,

they

shall

be

of

a

type

suitable

for

use

w¡th

electrical

instruments

situated in

a

hazardous

area,

and

be

fully

protected

against

the

environment.

4.8.4

Manufacturers

shall

be

selected

from

the Approved

Manufacturer's

list.

where

a

suítable

manufacturer

is

not

included

on the

list,

full

details

of

the

proposed

manufacturer

and

the instrument

or

system

together

w¡th

reasons

for

its

inclusion

shall

be submitted

to

the

Company

for

approval.

4.9

Line

Break-.Petection

Line

break resistors

are

required

for

all

contact-type

field

switches.

These

shall

be

f¡tted

in

the instrument

head

where

this

cert¡fication.

Where

this

is

not

possible,

they

may

does

not ín

fringe

on the

at the

nearest

Sheet

12

ol 163

Date

1s-9-94

ßev

pecification

Number

0't

s-JH-1 903

@fff

iz*rm,Group

r/,

Nt

2-0056

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 13/163

available

junction

point

to

the

instrument.

The

type and value

of

the resistor

shall be

agreed

to

w¡th

the

Distributed

Control

System

(DCS)

supplier.

4.1O

Use

ot,Barrier

Glands

4.1o.1

Barrier

glands

shall

be

avoided

whenever possibre.

4.1o.2

Barrier

glands

with

epoxy

putty

filling

shall be

used where

a failure

within

an

instrument

could

allow

a

flammable

process

medium

to

be at

pressure

within

the

terminal

enclosure.

4.10.3

The

contractor

shall

as

a

preferred

option

try

to

ensure

that

the

instrument design

is

such

that

failure

of

the

element

or

capsule

shall

not

cause

the

above

condition,

thus

avoiding

the

need

for

Barrier

Glands.

4.11

Shoo lnsnection

gnd

Testing

The

Contractor

shall

be

responsible

for

all inspectíon

and

testing of

materiats

and

equipment

prior

to

delivery.

No

equipment

or

materials

shail

be

delivered

unt¡l

all applicable

tests have

been

completed

and all

defects

rectified

and

re-tested

successfully.

Documentary

evidence

shall

be

available

for

Company

review if

requested.

4.11.1

Quality

Assurance and

Ouality

Control

a.

All

items

are to be

designed,

manufactured,

inspected

and

tested

under the

control

of

a documented

oA/oc

system,

General

and

specific requirements

are

provided

in

the

contract.

b. special

reference

to

inspection/test

actions

within

the

detailed

sections

of

this

specification

are

additional

to

and

shall not

replace

or reduce

the

oA/oc

requirements

provided

for

in the

Contract.

c

Approved

Manufacturer

specific

data

and

model

numbers

shown on

data sheets

approved

by

the

Company

in

no way

relieve

the

contractor

of

its

responsibility

to

provide

equipment

to

satisfy

the

servíce

conditions

stated on

the

specifications

and data

sheets.

lt

is

the contractor's

responsibility

to

not¡fy

the company

of

any

conflict

with

model

numbers,

materÍals

or

designs

specified.

d.

The

Company

shall

be

permitted

to witness

Approved

Manufacturer's

QA/oc

systems

operating

on

all

instruments

during

design,

fabrication,

assembly

and

testing.

Sheet

13

of 163

Date

15-9-94

Rav

pecification

Number

015-JH-1903

@ffili:*"x,Group

r

12-o056

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 14/163

z

þ

*

.I

ú.

o

The

Contractor

shall

submit

for

Company approval

minimum

inspection

requirements summaries

for

each

item

prior

to

purchase

of

the

equipment.

4.11.2

Shop

Testing

Company

reserves

the right

to

witness

test¡ng

or to

request

addítional

testing

according

to

its

requirements.

Such

witnessing

shall

include

all

control

valves,

relíef

valves,

composite

systems,

control

systems

etc.

The

detailed

requirement

shall

be noted

by the

Company

on

the Contractor's

submitted

Quality

(Test

and

lnspection)

Ptan.

4.12

PaintinLand Protective

Finishing

4.12.1 All

items

shall

be

fully

protected

against

the environmental

conditions,

the effects

of

the

process

fluids,

normal wear

and

the

handling

normally

expected

during

installat¡on,

erection

and

commissioning.

4.12.2

Where

an item

cannot

be rendered

suítable

for

the conditions

by

selection

of

material,

a

paint

finish

shall

be

applied

in

accordance

with

the

Engineering

Group

specifícation

entitled

shop and

Field

Painting

(Number

01s-XH-1OO5l.

Where

the

Engíneering

Group

Specification

calls for Approved

Manufacturers

standard,

an

epoxy

paint finish to

a

recognized

offshore standard

shall

be

the minimum

method of

protection

used.

e

4.12.3

4.12.4

All

Company-approved

aluminium

items

shall

be

fully

coated

on

all

exposed

surfaces.

4.12.5 Mounting

boards,

brackets

and

small moving

parts

not

suitable

for

painting

shall

be

manufactured

from

stainless

steel.

4.12.6

Fasteners

shall

be

stainless

steel

4.13

P_Lckino. Markíng and*DocumentaTion

4.13.1

General

For

all

relevant

requirements,

refer

to

the

Engineering

Group

Specification

entitled

Packing,

Marking

and

Docu.mentation

(Number

O15-UH-1001).

Cadmium

plating

is

not

acceptable as

a

final

finish

Sheet

14 of

t63

Dat8

1

5-9-94

Rev

pecification

Numbor

015-JH-',t903

@t0[fl9ffi#'*ouP

Nt

2-OO56

rl/

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 15/163

,T

*

o

ú

;t

ib

4.13.2

Packing

for

Shipment

a.

lmmediate

packaging

All

items

shall be

packed

in

the Approved

Manufacturer,s

standard

packaging

in

such

a

way

that

unpacking

will

not be

necessary

until

each

item is

required

for

erection.

All

necessary

protection

and

desiccants

shâll

be

included.

Equipmentshall

be

capable of withstanding

transport

and

storage

without

affecting

subsequent

sat¡sfactory

operation.

b.

Delivery

Packaging

Delivery

packaging

is

covered

by

the

Engineering

Group

specification

ent¡tled

Packing,

Marking

and

Documeìtat¡on'.

{Number

O15-UH-1001}.

4.14

For

all

relevant

requírements,

refer

to the

Engineering

Group Specification

entitled

Spare

Parts

and

Maintenance

Requirements

(Number

01S-KH-

1902).

5.O

CONTROL

VALVES

5.1

ApplicableStandardg

ANSI 816.5

Steet

pipe

Ftanges

and

Flanged

Firtings

ANSI 816.1O

Face-to-Face

and

End-to-End

Dimensions

for

Valves

ANsl 816.34

Varves -

Franged,

Threaded

and

werd

Ended

ANSI

816.37

Hydrostatic

Testing

of

Control Valves

ANSI

B

16.104

Control

Vatve

Seat

Leakage

API

RP

55O

Manualon

lnstatlation

of

Refinery lnstruments

and

Control

Part

1

Systems,

process

lnstrumentation

and

Control

BS

1655

Specífication

for

Flanged

Automatic

Control

Valves

for

the

Process

lndustry

BS

5793

lndustrial

process

Control

Valves

(lEc

5341

Sh6et

15

of 163

Datê

1

5-9-94

Fev

peciflcation

Number

01

s-JH-1903

@101,ï: m:x,Gmup

N12.0O56

rp

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 16/163

5.2

Scooe

of Contol Valve

Selection

A

controlvalve

shall

mean any

valve

which

has

a

process

control

function

on

the

plant,

normally

denoted

by havÌng

a

tag number

allocated

on the

P&lD. The following

additional

items

also

shall

be

considered

in

this section:

5.2.1

Actuated

shutoff

or

emergency

shutdown

(ESD)

valves

shall

be

treated as

control

valves

for

the

purpose

of

this

specification,

except where

a

topic

discussed

in

the

specification

specifically

states

control

valve,

and

the

context

identifies

that

the topic

is

relevant

to

modulating

control

valves

only.

5.2.2 Bypass

valves

shall

be considered

in

the

control valve

analysis

where

the

maxímurn

or

minimum

flow

allowable through

the

bypass

could

be

critical

for

plant

safety,

or

where

noise

or an

unusual

process

consideration

may

apply.

5.2.3

5.2.4

Electric motor-operated

valves

{MOVs)

for modulating

duty

are

covered

by

this section

of this

specification.

Electric MOVs

for

on/off

and

ESD

service

are covered

by

the

Engineering

Group

Specification

ent¡tled Motor-Operated

Valves,,

(Number

Ol

5-JH-1907).

2.

Top and

bottom

guided

(1-in.

valves

may

be

top

guided

only).

3. Single

seated

or balanced

trim

with

flow-under

plug.

4.

Flanged

to

ANSI

816.5

with

face-to-face

dimensions

in

accordance

with

BS 1

655/ANSI

Bl 6.1O.

5. Pneumatically

actuated,

spring

return

diaphragm

type.

6.

Fitted

with

pneumatíc

positioner.

7. Positioners

for valves

with

actuators

of

O.2

to l.O

barg

(3

to 15

psig)

spring range

shall

be

flrted

with

positioner

bypasses,

except

valves

in

split range

service.

5.3 Valve

Tvoes_

5.3.1

StandardSelection

a. Control

valves for

normal

service

shall

generally

be:

1.

Plug-type

globe

valves.

Sheet

16

of 163

Date

1 5-9-94

|

Rev

pecification

Number

015-JH-1903

@K[W,:nyx,Group

N

1

2-0056

r//

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 17/163

b. Other

trim

and

guidance

tvpes

may

be used

if it

can

be shown

that

there

are

advantages

in

the

particular service,

e.g.,

cage

guided,

low

dB

trim,

characterized ball

etc.

c

Skirt-guided

trim

shall

be

avoided

except

for

sizes

1

-112

in.

and

less

in

low

DP

service.

5,3.2

Self-ActingRegulators

Valves

shall normally

be

controlled

from

an externalsignalfrom

the

DCS

or

ESD

system

or

fronr

a

local

controlfer.

Self-acting

regulators

may

be accepted

for

some

services

if

it

can

be

shown

that

the

failure

characteristic

will

not

lead

to

dangerous

process

situations

occurring.

Where self-acting

regulators

are

used,

consideration

shall

be

given

to

the

use

of

line-tapped

signals in lieu

of

integral

bleeds.

5.3.3 Valve

Sizes

a.

The

minimum

valve

body

size

is 1 ín.,

unless approved

otherwise, in

writing,

by

the Company.

lf

smaller

sizes

are

approved,

top

guided

only

types may

be

used.

b.

Valves

shall

be selected

from

standard

pipe

line

sizes:

1

in.,

1-112in.,2in.,3

in.,

4 in.,

6

in.,

I

in.,

1O

in.,12in.,

14

in.,

16

in. etc.

Unusual

valve

sizes,

e.9.,

1-114

in.,

2-112

in.,

S

in.

etc. shall

not

be

used.

d.

Valves

in

flashing

service

may, subject

to

Company

approval,

have

larger outlet

size

than inlet

size.

5.3.4

Body

Pressure

Rating

The

mÍnimum

pressure

rating

for

controlvalves

shall

be

3OO lbs

for

sizes

up

to

and

including

f-in.

nominal

bore (NBl.

Larger valves

shall be

line

rated.

Subject

to Company approval,

shutoff

valves

of

quarter-turn

type

may

be accepted

as

split-body

type

and

may

be

at

line

class

rating

(if

the

line is

rated

less

than

3OO

lbs)

in

cases

where

the

piping

system

specifies identical

manual

valves

and

advantages

for

spares

stocking

can be

shown.

5.3.5 Screwed Valves

Screwed-end valves

for

screwed

piping

classifications

or

welded-in

valves

for

extreme service

conditions

may

be

allowed subject

to

specific

approval

by

the

Company

c

Shê6t

17

of

163

Dat€

15-9-94

Rev

pecification

Number

015-JH-1903

@lr0l,Y,: mx,*ouP

N12.0056

rl

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 18/163

G

z

))

*

É

5.3.6

Tight

Shutoff

Valves shall

not

be used

for

dual

purposes

(control

and

shut-

down)

when

leakage

cannot be

tolerated.

lf

necessary,

an

additíonal tight

shutoff

(TSo)

valve

shail

be

added

for

process

interrupt

service

in

cases

where leakage

would

tead

to

a

shutdown.

Valves

used for

control

shall not

be

specified

as

TSO.

b.

ouarter-turn

ball valves

may

be

used

for

on/off

service

on

clean

process

media.

Valves

for shutoff

service

on

dirty

media

shalf

be

specially

selected

for self

cleaning

propert¡es,

e.g.,

cutting

or

shearing

action

on

closing.

Techniques

such

as

seat

flushÍng

or

purging

shall

be

adopted

as

necessary

to

ensure

a

correct

seating

of the

trim.

5.3.7

Butterfly

Valves

Butterfly

valves

may

be

used

on

high-capacity

service

where

low-

pressure

losses

are

essentialand

the operating

differential

pressure

is

small.

The

minimum

allowed

body size

is

2

in.

wafer-type

valves

are

acceptable

provided

alignment

kits

are

part

of

the

scope

of

supply.

5.3,8 Ball

Valves

for

Control

Characterized

ball valves

of

size 1-1lZ

in.

and

upwards

may

be

used where

the available

pressure

drop

precludes

the

use

of

a

globe

valve. lf

the valve

design is

of

flangeless

body

type,

the

valve

shall

be

purchased

with

flange

studs

to

line

class and

an

alignment

kit.

5.3.9 Fotary

Plug

Valves

Low-void,

self-flushing valves

of

rotary-plug

type

may

be used

for

particulate

service

where

process

conditions

allow.

5.3.1O

Angle

Valves

Angle valves w¡th

top-guided

plug

may

be used with

Company

approval.

5.3.11 Three-Way

Valves

Three-way

valves

may

be used

for

mixing

or

flow

splitting

service,

and

may

be top

guided

only.

a

Sheot

 II

of

163

Date

15-9-94

Rev

pecification

Number

0 t

5-JH-1

903

ØW, ;v:m:x:-*

N I

2-0056

r/,

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 19/163

5.3.12

Soft

Seats

Globe

valves

for

tight

shutoff

service

in

clean

process

fluids

may

be

fitted

with

soft

seats

for

services

up

to

the

soft

insert

allowable

operat¡ng

temperature.

Lapped

seats, Stell¡ted as necessary, shall

be

used for

higher

process

temperatures.

5.3.13

Failure Action

The

valve

failure

position

indicated

on

the

P lD

shall be

achieved

in

the valve/actuator

design.

Fail

locked

systems

shall have

a

defined

drift

position.

lf

a

drift

position

is not

acceptable, double-

acting

actuators

with

appropriate

reservoir

and

trip

systems

shall

be

used,

as

for

ESD

valves, refer

to

section

5.7

of

this

specification.

5.3.14 Special Applications

Solutions

for

special

applications

or

conditions

not

covered

by

this

specifícation shall

be submitted

to

the

Company

for

approval.

5.4 Va.llre

Sizing

Requirements

5.4.1 Control of

Design Data

Valves shall

be sized

on

the

basis

of

defined

issues

of the

process

data

sheets,

P lD,

equipment

and

piping

data.

A

document

control

system shall

be

maintained

to

ensute that

the valves

are

built

to a

calculation

based

on

the

final

issue

of

data.

Data

sheets

shall

state

the

process

data

revision

number,

and

calculations

the

data

sheet

revision

number.

5.4.2

Limiting

Case

The

valve

purchase

data

sheet

shall

specify

the

applicable

upstream and

downstream

pressures

(or

pressure

difference)

for

all

cases

given.

Where

the

process

conditions

are such

that varying

combinations

of different

process

fluids

can be

ptesent, andlor the

maximum

or minimum

flow

can

occur

at

varying

pressure,

sufficient

calculations

shall

be

performed

to

ensure

that

the

l¡m¡ting

case is

selected

as the

design

case.

5.4.3

CalculationRequired

Valve

sizing

calculations

shall

be

performed

in

accordance

with

BS

5793

(lEC

534).

Valve size

calculations

shall

be

produced

at

least

for

the

rninimum, design

and

over-design

process

conditions,

Additional

calculations,

as

necessary,

shall

be

performed

to

establish

the correct

trim

form.

Valve

ons

shall

also be

Sheet

19

0f

163

Dats

15-9-94

Rev

pec¡flcation

Number

015-JH-1903

ØffilY,wx,Group

N 1 2-0056

r//

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 20/163

-t

Þ

*

E

o

.T

o

t.

performed

for

on/off

valves

(except

full-bore

ball

valvesl

to

confirm

¿dysrsê

process

condítions

are

not

occurring.

The

differential

pressure

for

a globe

valve shall

not

be

less

than

O.7

bar (10

psi)

at

design

flow. For

DP

less

than 0.7

bar

(10

psi),

alternative

valve

types

shall

be selected.

5.4.4

OverdesignMargin

The

valve

trim

shall

be

calculated

so

that

the design

flow is

between

7O

and

8Ùo/o

of the

fully

open

valve

capacity,

except

that

where an over-design

figure

is

also

to

be allowed

for

within the

valve

design,

this

shall

occur at not

gfeater

than

gO%

of

the valve

capacity.

5.4.5

Turndown

The minimum flow

shall be

attainable within

the

turndown

ratio of

the

selected

valve/controller

combination.

The

maximum

turndown

for

standard

valves

shall

not exceed

30

to 1.

For

valves

with

CV

less

than

1,

this

shall

reduce

to

1O

to

1. Special

valves

w¡th

h¡gh

turndown characteristics

may

be

ottered

to

the

Company

for

approval

to suit

special

process

conditions.

5.4.6

Valve

Stroke

The

stroke

of

the

valve

shall be

within the

band

lO%

to

geo/o

for

all

the

above criteria.

5.4.7

Effect on

Relief

System

The

calculation

shall

show

the flow

at

design

and over-design

pressure

when

the

valve

is fully

open.

The

resultíng

over

desígn

on

flow

shall

be

confirmed

against operating

conditions

and

relief

arrangements

to

confírm

plant

safety.

Where

the

flow

through

the

valve

is

critical

to

the sizing

of

a

relief

or

other

safety

system,

the

bypass valve

(if

fittedl

shall

also

be

fully

specified

with

an identícal

valve

characteristic

(CV¡

or

maximum

flow

limit

to

prevent

maloperation

under

bypass

control.

5.4.8

Trim

Capacity

The

selected

valve

shall

be

capable of

accepting

two

trim

changes

up

and

down

from

the finally

calculated

size

to allow for

process

design

changes.

This

may

be

varied,

subject

to

Company

agreement, when:

a. The

calculated

valve

body

is

less

than

1 in.

Sheet

20 of

163

Date

1

5-9-94

|

Rev

pecification

Number

01s-JH-1903

ØKWE##: H,Graup

r{

1

2-0056

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 21/163

r

*

o

t-

b.

The calculated

valve

body

is

two

or more sizes

below

line

size.

A

body

one size

smaller

than

the

line

shall

be

used

wirh

reduced

trim.

5.4.9

Leakage Rate

The

shutoff

flow

tleakage

ratel

shall

be

calculated

at

the

shutoff

design

pressure,

and

the

figure

stated on

the

calculation sheet

and

checked

agaínst

operat¡ng

conditions to

confirm

plant

safety,

and

to confirm

trip

cond¡tions

will

not

arise

during

process

interrupt.

Additional

TSO valves

shall

be

added

as

necessary.

5.4.10

Minimum

Stop

Where

a

minimum stop

is

specified

(based

on

flow), the

appropriare

valve

opening shall be

calculated.

5.4.11

Back

Flow

Where

back

flow

protection

is

required,

the valve

shall

be

checked

to confirm that

the

correct type

of

valve

and

adequate

actuator

force

has

been

selected.

5.4.12

Three-Way

Valves

For

essential

safety

reasons,

three-way valves

shall be

clearly

identified

as to

service,

¡.e,,

flow-splitting

or flow-mixing

or flow-

diversion, and

all operating

combinations

identified

before

making

the

calculation.

5.4.13

Two-Phase

Flow

Suitabte calculation methods

shall be

used

for

two-phase

and

flashing

flow

to

ensure

the

gas

phase

CV

is

properly

considered.

5.5

Trin__S_e_[ection

5.5.1

Characterized

Positioners

Wherever

possible,

the

trim

characteristic

shall

be

specified

so

as

to

obtain

a

linear

installed

valve characteristic

over

the

operating

range.

Characterized

positioners

are only

accepted

where

the

correct

inherent

trim

types

are

not

possible.

5.5.2

Selection

of

Characteristic

The

inherent

trim

characteristic

(or

characterization

in

the

case

of

non-globe

types)

shall

be

carefully

sel

provide

the

best control

compromise.

ected each

application

to

table

(table

1)

Sheet

21

of

163

Dat6

15-9-94

Rev

pecification Number

01sJH-1903

@l0tY, ##,n**

N1

2-0056

,/,

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 22/163

can be

used

to assist

the

selection.

The

Contractor is responsible

for

ensuring

that the

final

trim

selection

provides

control

within

specification.

5.5.3

Small

Pressure

Drops

Systems

shall be

indivídually

assessed

when

the

pressure

drop

across

the control valve

is

less

than

25o/o

of

the

total

dynam¡c

pressure

loss

at

design

flow

rate.

5.5.4

Standard

cases

lf

deta¡led

process

analysis is

not

available, the

trim

shall

be

selected

as

linear

where

5Oo/o

or

more

of

the

dynamic

system

pressure

drop at

design

flow is

across

the

valve,

and equal

percent

for

other applications.

TABLE

1:

SELECTION

OF

VALVE

CHARACTERTSTTCS

Compressible fluids if

downstream

system

capacity is large.

For

liquid

service.

For

compressible

fluids

if

downstream

line is

shorter than 3O m

{

10O

ft.)

if DP varies

more

than

5:1.

lf

process

demand

varies

more

than

1O:1.

Pressure

For

flow range greater

than

1O:'1,

except

when

measuring

element has no

square root

extractor

and

control

valve

is

divertíng

flow

from

the

measuring

elements.

lf

no

guide

lines are

available

flow

range

changes

less

than

lO:1

but system

rangeability

above 2Q:1,

i.e.,

desired

flow

rate

relatively

constant

but

valve

DP

varies

widely

due

to

load

changes.

When

valve

ís

in

bypass

and

controller

does

not

have

square

root

extfactor.

Flow

When

DP

increases

with

load

at a

rate

greater

than

2:1

lf

pressure

drop

is

constant.

lf

full

load DP

is less

than

2Oo/o

of no-load

DP.

Level

1

Ouick

Opening

inear

qual

Percentage

Sheet

22

ol

163

D¿te

1

5-9-94

Rev

peclf¡cat¡on

Number

015-JH-1903

@ïtÏl 'x;m,GrouP

N

1

2-0056

t/'

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 23/163

Where

control

can

be

obtained

by

on-off action.

When

maximum

valve

capacity

must

be

obtained

rapidly.

When

liquíd

temp.

may

be

controlled

by

mixing

liquid

streams.

lf

operating

conditions

are unpredictable.

General

5.6

Valve

Design

Reouirements.

5.6.1

Valve

Positioning

All

controlvalves

shall

be

supplied

with

a

positioner.

some

process

shutdown valves

may

require

a

positioner

ín

unusual

cases if

the

service

demands

precisely

controlled

rates

of opening

or closing.

these

shall

be indÍcated

on

the

P&lD

if

required.

For

afl

servíces

where

O.2

to

1.0

barg

(3

to

15

psig)

actuators

are

provided,

or

where

any

vibration

is

present,

pneumatic

positioners

with

a

separate

signal

convertor

shall

be

used.

other

services

may use

direct

electro-pneumatic

(E/P)

positioners

subject

to

Company

approval.

5.6.2

Failure

Action

The

action of valves

on

failure

of

the operating

medium

shall

be

determined

by

process

requirements

with

regard

to

safe

operation

and

emergency

shutdown

and

shall

be

noted

on

the

p&lD.

The

failure

action

shall

be

the

same

for

signal

loss,

air

power

loss

and

actuator

failure.

Field

accessories

shall be

provided

as

necessary

to

achieve

the

actions.

5.6.3 High-

and Low-Temperature

Service

Where

the

temperature

of

the

controlled

fluid

exceeds

230

C

(45O

Fl,

an

extension

neck

or

bonnet shall

be

used.

The

Approved

valve

Manufacturer's

recommendations

shall

be

followed

for

valves

in

cryogenic

service.

5.6.4

Bellows

Seals

For

specified

duties

as

agreed

to by the

Company,

e.g.,

toxic

fluids

or

penetrating

liquids,

the

valve

stems

shall

be

double

bellows

sealed

with

the

outer

bellows

gland

sealed

to the

stem.

An

appropriate

system

shall

be

fitted

to

monitor

the

enc

losed

space to

P&lD,

purging

etect

inner

bellows

leakage.

Where ind

Sheet

23 of

163

Dats

15-9-94

Rev

pecification

Number

01s-JH-1

903

@ïtÏf,Tn*x,G'louP

N12-0056

r/,

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 24/163

''u

Þ

*

ú,

ñ

of

the interspace

and

a

purge

flow

alarm

shall be

used.

5.6.5

Replacement

of

Trim

The valve

trim

(plug

and

seat,

ball

and seat

etc.)

shall

be

removable.

Access

to

the

trìm

for

globe-type

valves

shall

þe

from

the

top of

the valve.

lf

a

bottom

flange

is

fitted

to the

body

for

access

to

the seat,

this

shall

not

be

drilled

and

tapped

for

drainage

or

pulling.

5.6.6

Opening

and

Closing

Times

and

Valve

Response

a All

data

sheets

shallspecify

the maximum

allowed

opening

and

closing times

based

on

the

process

conditions

and equipment

being

operated. Valves

in

compressor

anti-surge

control

shall

have

a stroke

time not

exceeding

5 seconds.

b.

The

response

t¡me

shall

also

be

stated,

based

on

the

time

for

the

valve

to

complete

¡ts

movement

when the

signal

to

the

pos¡t¡oner

undergoes

a

1Ùo/o

step

change.

5.6.7

Minimum

and Maximum

Stops

Minimum

stops

shall

not

be used except

with Company

approval.

Minimum

flow

shall

be

achieved

by

providÍng

piping

and

valve

bypasses

with

an orifice restriction.

Maximum

stops

shall

only

be

fitted

¡f valve

over-design

cannot

be tolerated

safely.

ln

all

cases

the stops shall be

based

on

the

calculated

stem

positíon

for

given

flow and

pressure

conditions. The

stops

shall

as

a minimum

be

double

nut

locked

and

shall

be

permanently

secured,

preferably

by

welding,

after

proving

during

commissioning, The

stop

mechanism

shall

be

picked

out

in

a

contrasting

colour

to the

valve

and

actuator.

5.6.8

Seat

Leakage

Valve

data sheets

shall

state

the

seat

leakage

to be

tolerated.

Generally,

valves in

depressurising,

shutoff

and emergency shut-

down

shall

be specified

class

V

and

for

process

shutoff

shall

be

specified

to

class

lV

of

ANSI

B1

6.1o4.

Bubble-t¡ght valves

shail

be

specified

for

shutdown of

flammable

fluids

for

supply

to

end

users

such

as

the fuel supply

to a

fired

heater,

and for

all

total ESD

applications.

5.6.9

Gland

Packing

For

normalservice

on

clean

fluids,

a

bolted

bonnet

with

gasket

and retaining

recess

shall be

f¡tted,

packed

with

interlocking

self-lubrícating

packing

of

the Tefton

il

type. Lantern

a

Sheet

24

of 163

Dats

I

5,9-94

Revpecification

Number

01s-JH-1903

@ï|Jfg x :x,GrouP

N12-OO56

rlt

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 25/163

Packing

for

valves

above

S4O C

(1OOO F)

shall

be

the

subject

of

individual

agreement

with the

Company.

Low-temperature

service,

minus

ES

to

ooc

(minus

67

to 32 F)

shall

use

solid

teflon

V-rings

with

an

extended

bonnet

and

thermal

isolation

suitable

for

the

service.

ring

and

spring

followers

shall

be

used

For

higher

temperatures,

205

to

540 C

(400

to

1OOO FI,

solid

graphiie

packing shail

be

provided,

with

braided

packing

where

sorids

may

be

deposited

on

the

stem.

Finned

bonnets,

cooling

rings

and thermal

isolation

techniques

shall

be

used.

For

higher

tempsratures,

205

to

54o c

{4oo

to

1ooo F},

solid

graphite

packing

shall

be

provided,

with

braided

packing

where

solids

may

be

deposited

on the

stem.

Finned

bonnets,iooling

rings

and

thermal isolation

techniques

shall

be used

as

necessary.

b

e.

g

5.6.1O

Gland

Lubrication

5.6.1

1

c

d

t

Packing

shall

be

accessed

through

adequately

sized

bofted

stuffing

boxes.

The Approved

Manufacturer's

instalrations

instructions,

e.ç1.,

bonnet

over

or

under

body,

side-mounting

restrictions

etc.

shall

be strictly

followed

to

prevent

damage

occurring

to

the

packing.

other

packing

materiars

and

methods

may

be

offered

for

Company

approval

by

submitting

full

details,

accompanied

by

lhe

Approved

Manufacturer's

statement

of

the

advantages

offered.

All

glands

shall

be

drilled

and

tapped

for

lubrication

units

even

where

packing

is

self-lubricated.

Lubricators

shall

only

be

fitted

as

necessary.

un-used

tappings

shall

be

plugged.

The

plug

material

shall

be

compatibfe

with

the bonnet

marerial. Lubricatorõ

for

high-

pressure

valves

(greater

than 1S

barg,

i.e.,

220

psig

)

shall

have

an

isolatíng

valve

fítted

between

the

tubricator

and

the

stuffing

box.

Direction

of

Flow

The

direction

of

flow

through

the valve

shall

be

clearly

and

indelibly

marked

on

the

body,

preferably

by

a

cast

on

arrow

or stamped

plate.

Sheet

25

ol

163

Date

1

5-9-94

|

Rev

pecification

Number

01

5-JH-r

903

@fff,?,:J##,Group

i

I

H

H

Ë

li

i:

t:

(_'

l;*:

o

,Y

{

o

ú.

*

N

I 2-0056

rP

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 26/163

5.7 Actuator

Selection

and

Sizing

5.7.1

Selection

The

actuator

shall

be

purchased

together with

the

valve

as an

integrated

package.

Where

the

actuator manufacturer

is

not

on

the

Approved

Manufacturer s

list,

the

selection

is

sublect to

Company

approval.

b.

Actuators

shall

normally

be

pneumatic-diaphragm

type

for

globe

valves, plug

valves

and

butterfly

valves

and

pneumatic

spring return

piston

actuators

of

scotch

yoke

or

geared

type for

on/off

quarter-turn

valves.

c.

Piston actuators

of

air

or hydraulic

type

may

be

used

with

Company approval

when

it

can be

shown

that

long

strokes,

high

forces,

speeds

etc. are

essential.

d, Motor-operated

modulating

valves,

piston-operated

pneumatic

actuatofs,

airloil

systems

or

other

special

actuation

methods

may

be

used

in

special circumstances

subject

to

Compan

approval.

e.

For

controlvalves

the

normal

pneumatic

actuator

spring

range

shall

be

O.2

to

1 .O

barg

(3

to

t b

psig),

to

enabte

positioner

bypasses

to

be

fitted.

lf

it

can be

shown

that

a bypass

is

not

necessary

or undesirable,

or

if

circumstances

demand

a

higher

force

or

a

higher

speed

than

is

available

from

1.O

barg

(14.5

psígl,

an

alternative

spr¡ng

rate

may

be

used,

subject

to

approval

by

the

Company,

Under

no

circurnstances

shall

the

spring

rate

exceed

4,0

barg

(6O

psig).

The

actuator shall

be

able

to

w¡thstand

a mechanical

design

air

pressure

of

1

1.3

barg

1164

psig).

f.

Pneumatic

piston

actuators

are

to

be

sized

to supply

the

full

specified force

at

an

air

pressure

no

greater

than 4.O

barg

(60

psig).

5.7.2

Actuator

Sizing

Criteria,

Control

Valves

a The

actuator

shall

be

able

to

overcome a

minimum

of

125o/o

of

the

worst predictable

process

and

mechanical

forces

withín

the

valve,

inclusive

of

fluid

shutoff

pressures,

coking

or

solids,

gland

compression,

stíction

and friction

and

all

other

expected

or

possible

forces.

As

a

minimum,

the

process

force

shall

be

taken

as the

upstream

process

design

pressure

(or

the

piping

mechanícal

design

pressure

if

the

actuator size

resulting

from

this is

economicl

and an

atmospheric

downstream

pressure.

Where

this

calculation

results

in

actuator,

or

a

Sheet

26of163

Date

15-9-94

Rev

pecification

Number

015-JH-1903

@ïr0l ;lglx^G loup

(,

..

;:)

Þ

N

l2-0056

*

rft

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 27/163

c

one

which

is

too

large

to

provide

an

adequate

speed

of

response,

the

overall

solution shall

be

subject

to

Company

approval.

b.

lf

back-flow

protect¡on

is

pafi

of

the

valve

service,

the actuator

shall be

capable

of

the necessary

forces

to

achieve

the

operat¡on.

Sizing

criteria

for

actuators

for

three-way

valves

shall

be

chosen

to

enable

the

valve

to

operate

against

the

worst

maximum

design

differential

pressure

across

a

single

port.

All

the

operating

scenario

shall

be

reviewed

to

confirm that

the

worst

case has been

foreseen.

d.

The

selected

actuator

sizing

criteria

shall

be clearly

stated

on

the data

sheet.

For

pneumatic

actuators,

full

details

of

the

minimum,

maximum

and spring

design

air

pressures

shall be

noted.

e.

The

actuator shall

be

sufficiently

powerful

that bench setting

for

achievement

of

specified

leakage

rate

is not

required.

Actuator

Sizing Criteria,

Emergency

Shutdown

Valves

a.

Calculation

Requirements

1.

This section

applies

to

all

valves

controlled

directly

from

the

ESD

logic.

including

vent

valves

and

de-pressurizing

valves.

2. As

shutdown valves

spend

long

periods

without

cycling,

particular

care

shall

be

taken

to

ensure

that

the

actuators

deliver

sufficient

force

to

fully

open/close

the

valves

at

the

extremities of

operation when

called

upon

to

do

so.

Due

regard

shall

be

paid

to

the

possibility

of

sticking

and

gummy

deposits

on

valves

which

are stationary

for

long

períods.

3.

The torque

/

linear

force

delivered

by the

actuator

at the

minímum

air

design

pressure

shall be

at least

double

the

calculated force

for

the

most

arduous

of

the

following

conditions

or

combination

of

conditions,

and any

other

restrictions

applicable

in the

particular

application:

a.

Breakaway

force,

b.

Running

force,

c. Re-seat

force.

5.7.3

Shېt

27

ol 163'

Date

15-9-94

Rev

pecification

Number

01 s-JH-1903

@ft[ß,: *W^Group

N1 2-0056

d,

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 28/163

Gland

or

packing

forces

Coking,

dirt,

rust

or

gumming

clearance forces,

ínternal

and external.

Safety factors

on

all

the

figures.

Positive

tolerances

on

all measured

figures.

4. The

design check

shall

ensure

that

the

other

mechanical

components

of the

valve

are

specified

with

sufficient

strength

to

utilize

the

forces

of the

oversized

actuator.

b.

Actuator

Selection

1.

Actuators

shall normally be

diaphragm

type

when

globe

valves have

been

specified

for

shutdown duty,

and

spring

return

p¡ston

actuators

operat¡ng

through

a

scotch

yoke

or

gearbox

for

quarter.turn

type. Where

a

pneumatically

powered

shutdown

valve

is

in

a

servÍce

where

the

standard

spring

return

system

is not

suitable

due

to

return

force

or

closing

speed

restriction,

a double-acting

or

spring-assisted

system

shall

be used.

2.

The

requirernent

and

method

of

operating

double-acting

actuators

shall

be indicated on the

P lD,

with

the speed

parameters stated.

c. Actuating

Method

d

e

f.

g

I'

\

1

Generalfy,

the

actuation

method

for

ESD,

vent

and

de-

pressurizing

valves

shall

be selected from

two

types:

a

Direct

Pneumatic

Type

The

actuator

shall operate

directly

on

air

supplied

from

a

dedicated

reservoir.

b.

lndirect

Hydraulic Type

These valves

shall

be

operated

by

an

air-driven

hydraulic

package.

The

air

shall be

supplied from

a

dedicated

reservoir.

2.

For

both

types,

the

air

reservoir

shall be supplied

with

sufficient

reserve

capacity

to enable

three

complete

valve

operation

cycles.

The

reservoir

shall

be

sized

for 3-full

strokes

of the

valve

with

a

50o/o

safety

factor.

The

reservoir

may

be

dedicated

to

a

or

to a

group

Sheet

28of

163

DatB

15-9-94

Rev

pecífication

Number

01s-JH-1903

@lr0l,';*w,GrouP

N

l2-OOs6

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 29/163

*

,b

iL

ú

of

valves when

the

service

of

these

valves

is

strictly

related

and controlled

by the

same

ESD

logic

sequence,

and

the

valves

are

positioned

within a 5-m

pipe

run

from

the reservo¡r.

3.

The reservoir

shall

be

charged at

the normal

Facility

instrument

air

pressure.

The

supply

to

the

reservoir

shall

incorporate filters and check

valves

to

ensure

that

the

air

supply

for

the

ESD

valve

is

retained

during

loss

of

general

air

pressure.

The

design

pressure

for

reservoir

sizing

purposes

shall

be

the

same as the

actuator sizing

design

pressure,

which

shall

not

exceed

4.O barg

(6O

psig).

d.

Trip

Action

The

trip

action

shall be

initiated

in all

cases

by the

de-

energisation of a soleno¡d

valve(s)

powered

from

the

Facility

ESD

system,

for

all

situations

including

reset,

ESD

trip or

controlled

vent action

and any

air

failure

actuation

result¡ng

from

the reservoir low-low

pressure

switch signal.

2.

For

the

low

air

pressure

alarm

and safety

act¡ons,

electronic

pressure

switches

shall

be

fitted

to the

reservoir

to detect

when

the air

reservoir

pressure

is at

15o/

(low

alarm) and

at

5% {low-low trip)

above

the

reservoir

sizing

pressure.

The low

pressure

switch

shall

bring

up

DCS

alarm

to

warn of

a

possible problem

on

the

air

supply.

the

low-low

pressure

switch

signal

passes

to

the

ESO

system,

which

will

institute the

necessary action

on

the

logic

system

as

follows:

â.

Single-Acting

(Spring

Return)

Actualors

Unless

otherwise specífied,

the

low-low

pressure

switch

input

will

prevent

further

use

of

air

toward

the

plant

unsafe

(run)

condition

but allow

manual

selection of

a

trip

to the plant

safe condition. The

valve

will

thus

stay

in

the

Run

condition

until

the

air

pressure

drops

below

the

spring-return

force,

the

spring

will

then

drive the

valve

toward

the

safe

position.

b.

Double-Acting Actuators

Unless

otherwise specified,

the

low-low

signal

shall

cause

a

trip of

the

valve

to

the safe

position

while

there

is

stíll

sufficient air

to ensure that

the

valve

can

be

moved

to

the

safe

position.

1

1

Rev

pecification

Number

01sJH-r 903

Øtí017,1#,#^Group

Shoet

29

of

163

Date

15-g-94

N12-OO56

rf

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 30/163

lt

.l-

ú

*

3.

At

Company

option,

alternative

strategies

may

be

adopted.

The

Contractor

shall

submit

full

details

of the

philosophy,

the

hook-up

and

proposed

field

and

control

room-mounted

instrument

and operator ¡nterfâce for

Company

approval.

4. The

ESD

logic

shall

not

be

self-resert¡ng. The

solenoid

valve

shall

be

of

mechanÍcally

self-resetting

type,

but

shall

require

electrical

reset

by

operation

of

a local

pushbutton

open/close

stat¡on

interfacing

with the

ESD system,

operable

when

the

log¡c

has

been

enabled

by the control

room

operator.

Details

are

provided

in

the

Engineering

Group

Specification ent¡tled

Emergency

Shutdown

Panel

(Number

Ol

5-JH-10951.

5.

Where

an

ESD

valve is also

used

to

perform

a

process

interrupt

function,

an

additional

solenoid valve

shall

be

supplied. This

shall

be

operated

from

the control

logic

and

shall be

so

positioned

and

piped

that

the

ESD function

shall overrule

the control

function

in

the

case

of

an

ESD

trip.

5.7.4

Actuators

for

Motor-Operated

Valves

(MOVs)

MOV

actuators fall into

two service categories:

Direct

motor/gearbox

drives

for

direct

application

to

the valve

stem

in

on/off

application

(no modulation) are covered by the

Engineering

Group

Specification entitled

Motor-Operated

Valves

(Number

01

5-JH-1

907).

b.

Electric

MOVs for

modulating

service:

actuators in

this

category

shall only

be used

when

stipulated

or

auThor¡zed

by

the

Company.

The

actuator,

electr¡cal

controlcard

and

power

control

gear

shall

all

be

purchased

as a fully

integrated

matched

set.

The

actuators

can

be used

in

closed-loop

service,

or

open

Ioop

with

valve

position

feed

back

by

precision

potentiometer.

The

actuator

shall

be fitted with

torque

and end

of travel switches

that

shall override

the control

signals.

The

actuators

must

be certified

for

use

within

the

hâzardous

area

classification

of

the

Facifity,

5.8

Actualor Cpnstruçt¡on

5.8.1

DiaphragmActuators

ct

The

pneumatic

diaphragm

actuator

shalf

be of

totally enclosed

spring-return

type.

a

Sheet

30

ol

163

Date

1 5-9-94

Rev

peclfication

Numbsr

015-JH-1903

Øtí01';y,:xx^G,oup

rd

N12.oos6

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 31/163

b.

The

actuator

shall

be

direct

or

reverse

acting

according

to

the

required

process

failure

action. Within this constraint,

direct

acting

(spring

up)

actuators

are

preferred

in

the

sandy

environment due

to

the

avoidance

of a shaft

seal

and

wiper.

The spring shall

be

of

linear

characteristic

over the

stem travel

range,

and be

corrosion

resistant.

d.

A

spring

screw

and

locknut

shall be

readily

placed

for

adjustment.

e. The

yoke

shall

be

of

cast steel

or

ductile iron,

adeguately

painted

or

plated

against

the

environment

in

accordance

with

the

Engineering Group

Specification

ent¡tled

Shop

and

Field

Painting

(Number

015-XH-1OO5).

A valve

position

indicator

shall

be

f¡tted,

synchronized

and

scaled to

match

the

actual

valve

stroke. The

connect¡on

to the

valve

stem

shall

be

a

threaded split

clamp with

clamping

bolt.

f. The

diaphragm

construction.

case

shall

be

of

botted

pressed

steel

g.

The

diaphragm

shall

be of

nylon

reinforced

neoprene

or

Buna

N. the

maximum

alfowable

deviation

from

the rated

effectíve

area

shall

not

exceed

plus

15%

and

minus O%

through

the

ent¡re

travel.

5.8.2

Ouarter-Turn,

Piston-

and Cylinder-Type Pneumatic

Actuators

a Only

heavy

industríal

types shall

be

accepted.

The actuator

shall

preferably

be of steel

with a chrome-plated

bore,

or

stainless

steel.

High-grade aluminium

with

a

suitable

coating

system

rnay

be

used,

subject

to

Company approval.

b.

The flow

sheet

for

materials

selection

guidance

issued with

the

Contract

documents

shall indicate

where

the

level

of

HrS

present

in

the

process

fluid

can

be

above

the

partiat

pressure

level

indicated

as

critical

within

the

NACE

MR0175.

When

any

part of the

plant

falls within

the

requirement

for

materials

and

fabrication

to

be

in

accordance

with

the

NACE

code, it is

deemed

that

the HrS content

of

the

general

atmosphere

over

the

whole

Facility

requires

rhe use

of solid

stainless

steel

actuators,

also

in

these

circumstances,

chrome

plating

is not

permitted.

c.

The

mechanism,

shafts

etc.

shatl

be

adequately

protected

against dust ingress.

lf

bellows

are

used, the

design

shall

protect

against

dust

being

drawn

in

due

to air change

during

operation.

Exposed

shafts shall

c

IÆffiRW

. Tie

rods

and

other

exposed

fastenings

shall

Sheet

31

of

'l

63

Date

1

5-9-94

Rev

pecification

Number

01s-JH-1903

@fr|JW,ym,Group

N 1 2-0056

t/

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 32/163

d.

Ports

shall

be

a

minimum

size

114-in.

NPT.

Smaller

ports

wíth

adapters are

not acceptable.

Ports

of

at least

114

in.

of

other

thread

forms

shall

be

accepted

provided

they are fitred with

permanenl

NPT

thread

form

adapters.

Exhaust

ports

shall

be

fitted

w¡th

a

silencer/sand

screen.

e

An

external

pos¡tion

indicator

and

inductive

type

cert¡fied

l¡mit

switclres

(in

a

protective

box)

shall

be

fitted.

5.8,3

Hydraulic

and

Special-Purpose

Actuators

A

detailed

specification

and analysis

of all

proposed

actuators

shall

be

presented

to

the

Company

for

approval.

5.9

Nols_e, Flashing

and

Cavitation

5.9.1 Noise

The

Company

shall

be

informed

of

atl

cases where

the

predicted

noise

level

of

a control valve

or

its

bypass

valve

approaches

to

within

3

Db

of

the

maximum

permitted

noise

level

of

85 dB

A,

or

any

lower fígure

stated In

the Engineering

Group Specífication

entitled

Plant/Equipment

Noise

Control

(Number

015-NH-1104).

ln

all

cases

where

it is

necessary

to

use

specia¡

control valves,

silencers

or

other

devices,

they

shall

be

subject to

the

prior

approval

of

the

Company.

b.

Where

the

outlet

pressure

is

less

than

half

the

inlet

pressure

in

the

design case, valve

noise

will

probably

occur

at normalduty.

noise-reducing

trim

shall

be

specified

as

standard

for

these

valves.

Control

valve

noise

shall

wherever

possible

be stopped

at

the

seurce.

The

preferred

design

priorìties

are:

1

.

Re-appraisal

of

the

process

design or

arrangement

to avoid

the

root

noise

cause.

2.

Selection

of

a

suitable valve

and

trim

type.

3. Lo-dB

plates

downstream

of

the

valve.

4.

lnsulation

of the

valve

and

downstream

píping

Geographical

relocation

of

the

equipment

items

and

piping

to

enable

externalscreening

to

be

considered,

ol

valves

to

be away

from

personnelareas.

This

approach

can

only

be

used

when

the

valve

noíse

contribut¡on

does

not cause

the

global plant

noise

to

exceed

the

stated

limits.

a

c

5

Shaat

32

of 163

Dato

15,9-94

Rev

pecification

Numbe¡

01s-JH-1

903

@WF;:ç*,Grvup

N1 2-0056

(p

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 33/163

Valves

shall

be

selected that

are specially designed

for

these

services.

Valves

of

low

recovery

type,

using

frictional

paths,

multiple

port

cages,

vortex flow

or

other

methods

of

velocity

and

anti-cavitation control

shall

be

specified.

5.9.2

Potential

Flashing

and/or

Potential

Cavitating Service

a

b.

Potential

blockage

of

the

trirn shall

be

carefully

considered

when

selecting

fow

recovery

valves.

Design

appraisal

shall

be

conducted

to

confirm

that

any

particulates

or

sludging

present

in

the

process

will

not

block the

passages.

Normally, drillings

less than 3-mm

(1/8-in.)

diameter

shall

be

avoided.

5.10

Construction

Fequirements

5.10.1

Pressure

Envelope

The

pressure

envelope

is

defined

as

all

parts

of

the

valve

whích,

if

a

failure

occurred,

would

allow

process

fluids to

be

released to

the

atmosphere.

This

includes

the

body,

bonnet,

flanges,

plugs

and seal

plates

and

any

other

part

retaining

the

pressure.

b. The

pressure-part

materials

shall

be

equal

to

the

line

specification for

piping

class valves

in

the same

service.

The

Approved

valve

Manufacturer

shall,

however,

confirm that

the

mater¡al is

fit

for the service

and

the mechanicaldesign criteria

stated

on the

data

sheet.

ln

the

¡nterests

of

standardization,

a

higher

grade

of

material

may

be

offered

to

cover

a

number of

services;

however,

the

metaflurgy

shall be

individually

verified

by the

Contractor

as

suitable

for

the applicable

service

conditions.

d.

Forged

materials

shall

be used

throughout

except

with

Company

approvaf

for alternatives.

5.1O.2

Valve

Trim

The

valve

trim

is

that

part

of the valve

which

controls

the flow

of

fluids.

This

includes

the

välve

seat

and

plug,

ball

etc.,

the

stem, the

cage

and

any

other

renewable

parts

separate

from

rhe

body.

b. The

materials

for

the

valve

internals

shall

be

selected

for

the

individual

service.

with

a

minimum

reguirement

of 316

stainless

steel.

For

special

services,

the

Approved

Manufacturer s

recommendation

shall

be

offered

for

approval

by

the Company.

d

c

a

Date

15-9-94

Rev

pecification

Number

01s-JH-1903

@lffi

:,v,äw,Group

Sheet

33 of

163

N r

2-0056

rp

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 34/163

c

The

addition

of stellíte

coat¡ngs

(or

solid

stellite

parts

for

small

valves

and

special

servicesl

and

special hardening

treatments

shall

be performed as necessary.

d,

Chrome

plating

of trim

parts

is not

permitted.

e

Table

2

indicates

the

minimum

selection

various

services:

requirements

for

TABLE 2: TRIM

MATERIALS

AND

APPLICATION

Servlca¡ Vrln

lyP"

Vôlva S¡2. P L¡rlr

ln B rlPsl)

Temp Limlt

"c

fFt

Ttlm

M.tedrl¡

G"nerrl

Thrcttl¡ng

S6rvicrs, includin0

oåBss

and vâpours,

noutrrl water,

hydroc¡rbon

liqukla,

ol

chemic¡l¡ comÞ¡tlble

whh trim mltrr¡¡l

Globo

Valvaa

Sízas

to

2 in.

3

in.

or

larget

o.14 t20ol

o.7

(root

3OO

t6OOl

300

16001

Plu0

Seöt

Ring6

Stem

Guidc

Buchinqs

31

6 St ¡nle8¡ St€.|

3l 6 St.inlsss

Steel

316

Ståinbßß

Steel

Hardened 44OC

or l7-4PH

Steãm

Ganer¡l

-

Samc scruice

 g abovc cxcopt

ðppl¡clt¡on

raqu¡rBs

frcqusnt

¡hut-oft

Globc

Valvca

All sizc¡

2

ln.

3 in. or larger

s49

lTOOl

0-t4

l2ool

(}7

troot

300

t600t

300

1600t

300

t6001

Ruc

Seat Rlnga

-

Stellitö Fåced

So¡tino

Éurr cât

-

316

St¡inbsr

Stæl

-

Stellita F¡ccd

Scat¡ng

Surflcâr

-

316

Str¡nl.ß

Stâol

All ¡izc¡

G7

llool

300

t600t

Flárh¡ng ltquadr

Slom

Guido

Buahinge

-

Hrrdcnad 44OC

ot 17-4

PH

-

44OC not

u8.d in

¡c¡dic

boilar

l6üd.

Sta m

6ónorrþSðm

Seruices

ås rbova

lxccpt

lraquent

chut-off

Globo

Vålv6s

All Sizo¡

All

S¡zs¡

All

Sizes

1

8-25

(25ù

35Ol

7-25

t10G'

sSol

385

t7501

385

(75Ot

385

1750t

Plug

-

31

6 St¡¡nlcsE

St.rl

-

slcll¡Îô Fåcàd

S€at¡ng

Surflcr3

and Guidc

PostB

.

316

Str¡nlo¡E

St€rl

'

Stâllitr Fac6d

Sartino

Sur{rcc¡

¡nd Guida

Posts

-

31

6

Sta¡n¡6s3

Stâ.|

S.rt

B¡ngs

Flaehing

Liquidc

7-25

(10G350t

Stem

Gu¡do

BuEhinos

31

6 Stå¡nl'¡¡

Stael

St€llho Fåccd

Corr

or 1 7-4

or Hardcncd.

Grnorrl

-

S¡mc ¡oruica

sc ôbovc

rxcapt

¡pplic¡tíon

roquiro¡

lrcqu¡nt shul-oft

Globo

V¡lvc¡

All

siza¡

Graater

than

2s{35Of

645

fi

200t

Plug

-

316

Strinlô6;

Stool

-

All

curfaccE Stsll¡to

oxcapt

bôtween

D.P.

pluge

and

baween

pluge

Énd

guids

poBt

tôar¡ng

surfsc€¡ not

required.

-

31

6 Str¡nlrss

Stoel

-

Stêil¡l¿

Shoath

-

Hard

Chrome

Finiah

All

sizes Grester

thrn

25(3501

6 ts

ll

2001

Fl6ßhing liquids

Sàrt R¡ñgs

Stcm

Guid¡

Bushinge

-

Sta¡nlGs3

Stc6l

-

StÊllito

F¡ced

Corr.

Chlorine ¡nd

Fluorino

G¡scs

¡nd Compoundg

Globc

Valvoa or

Spacer

Typo

All ¡izcg

1

4(2001

246(5001

All

lrim

part6

of

Monel

For

rll

S ruicas

Globe

Valvoe

w¡th

1OOll44Ol

or body

rlting

¡f

lss

s

1

90

(4001

Trim

Vsr¡at¡onG

Plu0

-

Ho¡dened

I 7-4 Pll

41

6

or

44OC

Cagc

Stom

t 7.4

PH.

TÊ1

câgô Tr¡m

All

SizaÊ

St..l

Sheet

34 of

163

Date

15-9-94

Rev

peciflcation

Number

01s-JH-1903

@|ffi

?,v:#":H,Group

l

i

I

i

I

I

I

I

i

I

I

I

I

I

i

I

I

I

I

I

l

I

¡

l

¡

I

5

h

Ë

fi

F

ll

_.[],

o

ú

N

1

2-0056

*

rf

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 35/163

Ølr0l,,;y" ;xx,Group

1

Rev

pecification

Number

01s-JH-1903

Sheet

35 ol

163

Date

15-9-94

Sleeve

.

Bet€r to

Hills

or McC¿nna

or

D¡âphrâgm

Selecl€d

SuÞpl¡er

-88

to 162

l-lO0

to

3501

1O(l50)

Max.

Depends upon

e ize.

1

thru

12 in.

¿und6r8

Prtcnt

or

Flex-Sleeve

Slurr¡€s

rhd

Abras¡ves

Chemic¡ls

Ball

.

17.4 PH

of

or 316

Sta¡nless

Shalts

Ball

Seal

-

17-4 St^ St.or

316

Nitr¡dBd

-

31

ô St.st.or

E¡ôstomer

lor

Sålâctod

Service

3OO

(600)

e

tublishôd

3

rhru 16

ìn.

harac-

tc¡ized B¡ll

High

lull llow

tcquired

Hl0h shut-olf

dìllðrðnt¡rìs

slurries

Disc

Shâlt

Boarings

-

Ca¡bon

Sto€l

Unlcss

otherwise

spèc¡li6d.

-

316

Stâinlesr

Steol

or

l7'4

Ptl

(¡e

r¿qulrod

lor

Pl

.

Hoâvy

duty

por

Mônufu

clursr' 6

Sp€c¡licâtion

Seâ¡

-

Ârelål-lo-Motrl

ElÀBtomer

99 tô

79

(^'l

20 to

2001

$¡me

r

24

(2801

DëÞeñdant

upon

¡ize

and sh¿ft

materiàl

ând

dirmctet

Same

Sårnð

2

thru

36

in.

2

thru

36

in.

2

lhru

36 in.

Buttorfly

¡gh

Capäcity

-

Low

OP

Liquid,

Sta¡m

and

våpour8

Lork.gê

âquål

to

publ¡chod

flow

tt

O'opaning BuÞble

tight requ¡r€d

Manufrcturer's

strñdôrd

or rocommsndåt¡on

Spocily

in dotô¡l

ôn dôt¿

3heet.

Fåctory

Rsôomman

dât¡an

FãaÎory

Rscomm-

ênd t¡on

All

¡i¿os

ll Typas

arvic6s

nol l¡stèd

Tdrn

MttetiâlE

emp

Lirir

"c

rF)

P

L¡rn¡t

ln

BtrlPSt)

Valve

Slze

alve

Type

seruices

Note

5.11

17-4

PH

stainless

steel

or

any

air-hardenable

alloy

must

be

brought

to a

hardness

of 22-25

Rockwell for use

in wet HrS

service.

18-8

St, St, is

a

recommended

alternate.

5.1O.3

Butterfly

Valve

Shafts

All

wafer

and flangeless

butterfly

valves shall

be

purchased

with

the Approved

Manufacturer's

alignment

kit,

and

the

valve

shall

be

properly

centered

in

the

pipeline

to

prevent

the

shaft

from

beíng

exposed to

overstress,

b. The

combined

stress due

to rotation

forces

and

shear

in

the

shaft

and

pins

at

the

weakest

point,

and

allowing for

stress

intensification

factors

shall

not

exceed

50%

of

the allowable

maximum stress for the

malerial.

c.

The

bearings

shall be

mounted

external

to

the

packing glands

for

maximum

support

and

minimum

overhang.

lnstÊllation

Notes.. Bypasq

and Ha0dwheel

Philosophy

5.

1

1

.'l

Control Valve

Location

Control

valves

for

flammable fluids

shall

not

be located

adjacent

to

hot

equipment.

The

location

shall

be agreed

1o

with

the Company.

a

rf'

.l.'

,r

o

t-

*

ir

2-0056

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 36/163

5.1'1.2

Control

Valve

Accessibility

Control

valves, whether

electrically,

pneumatically

or

hydraulically

operated

shall

be ¡nstalled

so

that

they

are

readily

accessible

from grade

or

a

fixed

platform

for

ease of

maintenance

and

hand

operation.

b. Control

valves

shall

be

installed so

that

the

stem

¡s

truly

vertical.

Where

this is

not

possible,

valves

can

be

installed

in

other orientat¡ons,

provided

that:

The Approved

valve Manufacturer

approves

the

valve/actuator

comþination being installed

in

the

alternative

or¡entat¡on

especially

wíth

respect

to

the

overhung weight

of

the actuator

being

carried

by

the

yokelseal

assembly

and

the

effect caused

to

the

gland

packing.

2. Agreement

of the

Company

is

obtained.

c.

Notwithstanding

the above,

actuators

for

butterfly

valves

shail

always

be installed

with

the

actuator

shaft

vertical

and

easily

accessibfe

from

grade

or

fixed

platform.

d,

Clearance

shall

be

provided

above

and

below

control

valves

so

that

the

bottom flange

and plug can be removed

with

the

valve

body in

the

pipelÍne.

Where

rhis

is not

possible,

subject

to

agreement

with

the Company, the

valve

body

may

be

swung

around

a

single

flange

bolt

for

maintenance

work. ln

this

case,

there

shall

still

be

allowed

sufficient

access

to

the

valve

to

enable

inspection

of

the

valve

trim

without

remov¡ng

any

flange

bolting.

5.11.3 Bypass

and

Handwheel

Philosophy

The

Contract-specific

P lD shallshow

all bypasses

required

for

startup

and

for

the

maxirnum

availability of

the

plant

during

breakdown,

upset

conditions

and

maíntenance

operatíons

without

affecting

safety.

b.

ln

certain

instances,

full

bypassing

of a

control

valve,

using

block

and bypass

valves

will

not

be

possible.

ln

these

circumstances,

a

valve

actuator

override

by

use

of

a

handwheel

shall

be

indicated

on

the

p lD,

enabling

control to

be

manually

executed

while

maintenance

of

the control

and

actuating

elements

of

the

loop

is

conducted.

ER

a

1

a

o

Sheet

36

of

163

Dåte

15-9-94

Rev

pecification

Number

01

5-JH,1903

@101,7,Y,n::x,Gr'uP

N12-0056

r*

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 37/163

c

When

fitted,

block

and

bypass

systems

shall as

a

minimum

conform

to the

following:

1

Sizes shall

not

be smaller than

API RP550,

Part

l,

section

6, Table

6.1

.

2.

Pipeline

stresses

shall

not

transfer

to the bypass

line

when

the

main valve is

removed

for maintenance.

3. When

the

control valve is mounted

in

a

pre-stressed

line,

the bypass

shall be

anchored

or located

separately

to the

main

line, with

sufficient flexibility

to

prevent

stressing

forces

affecting

the bypass line.

The

píping

etther side

of

the

control valve shall have

provision

for

safe

location

while

the

valve is

out

of

líne.

4. Where

block

valves

are

provided,

a

valve

or

vatves

shall

be

fÍtted

so that when

the

block

valves

are

closed,

pressure

may

be

relieved

and the control

valve

drained.

Such drain

and

vent

valves

shall be of

roddable

type.

d. As

a

general

guideline,

though

possibly

overruled by

process

considerations

or safety

considerations.

Contract-specific

or

Company instructions,

the

following

shall apply:

1.

Cases

where

block and bypass shall normally âpply

(al

Where

a

valve

controls a

service common

to a

number

of

users.

(b)

Where

a

valve is

in

continuous

operation

and

there

is

not

sufficient

assurance

of reliability

over

the

antíc¡pated

period

between

plant

overhauls,

e.g.,

on

corrosive

or erosive service

or

where

the temperature

is

below

0 C

(32'F)

or

above 180'C

(365'F).

The

shutdown

cost of the

appropriate

sect¡ons

of

the

plant

de-commissioned due

to

a failure shall

be

taken

into

account.

(c)

Where

failure

of

the

valve

would

necess¡tate

continuous

operator

action

to

rnaintain

the

process

control,

e,9.,

the

fuel

supply

to

a

fired

heater.

{d}

ln

the case

that block and

bypasses

are

not

initially

specified,

but the service

is

safe

to have

them, the

piping

layout

shall

allow

for

the future

addition

of

the

facility

Sheet

37

of 163

Date

1

5-9-94

Rev

pecification

Number

01s JH.1903

Ølr0l,';:xw,*oup

Nl2.OO56

ù

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 38/163

le)

Where

conditions

(a),

(b),

or

(c)

are

met

and

a

handwheel is indicated

on

the P&lD,

but

the cost of

a

handwheel

is

greater

than a block and

bypass,

then

the

block

and by-pass shall

be

installed.

2.

Cases

where valve

handwheel

shall normally

apply:

{a)

Where

conditions

are

met where

it would

be

safe

to

provide

a

bypass,

but

a

block and

bypass system

is

not

selected,

a

permanent

side-mounted handwheel

shall

be

fitted.

(See

also Cases where

block

and

bypass

shall

normally

apply,

1 above).

3.

Cases

where

a

by-pass

or

handwheel

shafl

not

be

fitted

(a)

Bypasses

shall

not

be

fitted

on

valves

for

process

shutdown

or

ESD

service.

(bt

(c)

(d)

Bypasses

shall

not

be

fitted

for

hydrogen

service.

Bypasses

shall

not

be

provided

on

three-way

valves,

Bypasses

shall

not

be fitted around

self-acting steam

pressure

regulators.

5.12

Accessories and

Ancillarv

ltems

5.12.1

Mounting

a

Where

accessories

are

required

with

the valve,

they shall

be

purchased

by

the Contractor as a

fully

rnounted

and

tested

assembly. The

rnechanical

installation

arrangements for

the

valve

shall

be

carefully

reviewed

before

designing the

accessory

rnounts

to

ensure

that the completed system

is

accessible

for

operation

and

for

maintenance

and

bypassing

arrangements

in

the

¡nsta¡led

position.

b.

As a

general

rule

1.

Pneumatic

or E/P

pos¡t¡oner

shall

be

fully

mounted

2.

Solenoid valves

shall be

fully

mounted.

3. Limit

switch

sets,

position

transm¡tters, etc.,

shall

be

fully

mounted.

4.

Handwheel

sets

shall be

fully mounted

(except

for

butterfly

valves).

5.

Lock-up

kits

shall be

fully

mo

Sheet

38

of 163

Dåt€

15-9-94

8ev

peciflcation Number

015-JH-1903

@ït|f,W,H,**

Nr

2-0056

(f

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 39/163

6.

Supply

air sets

and

backup

reservoir

and fail-safe kits shall

normally

be

tested

with

the

valve but

supplied

loose

for

mounting adjacent

to

the valve. ln

the

case of

large

valves,

the

air

set

may

be

mounted

on

the

valve.

7.

All

piping

and

fittings

on

the valve

and

accessories

shall

be

in

accordance

with

the

Engineering

Group

Specification

entitled

lnstrumenr

lnstallat¡on

(Number

01

5-JH-1

9O8)

and

be

of

stainless

steel

or

copper/brass rnaterial

in

accordance

with

the

H2S

considerations.

The size

shall

be

3/8-in.OD

for

power

air and 1/4-in. OD for signals. Twin

ferrule

stainless steel

fittings

shalt

be

used

when

stainless

piping

is fitted.

5.12.2

Pneumatic Positioners

Pneumatic

positioners

shall

be

of

the

force

or motion

balanced

type, suitable

for

O.2

to

1 .O

barg

(3

to

15

psi)

input

sígnals.

They

shall

be

fitted

wíth

S0-mm

(2-in.)

dial

pressure

gauges

indicating

the

signal

input

pressure

and

the

output

pressure

to

the

valve

actuator. The air connection size

shall be

1i4 NPT.

b.

The cases

shall

be

resistant

to

the

environmental

cond¡tions

and

the

bleed

port protected

from

windblown

dust

and

sand.

All

mechanical

lÍnkages,

fastenings

etc.

shall

be suitable for

operation in the sandy

environment

and shall be of

stainless

steel

material.

d. The

positioner

shall

be reversible

in the

field,

and

shall

be

fully

adjustable

for span.

The

positioner

shall

be side

mounted on

globe

valves,

and

be

top

mounted

on

quarter-turn

piston

actuated valves.

f

.

The

output

will

normally

be

within the

range

0.2

to

1.O

barg

{3

to

15

psíg).

lf

a

higher

output

range

ís

required

the maximum

pressure

shatl

be 4.0

barg

(6O

psig),

but the

positioner

shall

withstand

8.0 barg

(120

psig)

without

mechanical

damage.

g.

A

pneumatic

bypass

shall

be fitted

to

all

positioners

for

0.2 to

1.0

barg

(3

to

t

5

psig)

actuators unless

the

application

is

inappropriate, and

shall

be

defined

on

the

data sheet.

ct

c

ô

@10|,';:s*,Group

Sheat

39

of 163

DãTE

15-9-94

Rev

pecification

Number

01 5-JH-1 903

N12-O056

ú

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 40/163

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 41/163

,r

t-

3-

j¿

*

ln

the event that

a

drift

âction

is

not desirable,

the

valve

shall

employ

a double

acting actuator

and

positioner,

and

the

lock-

up

kit

shall

act on both

sides

of the

actuator.

5.12.6

Fail

Locked

Action

for

On/Oft

Valves

Where

a

fail

locked

action

is

specified for

on/off

valves,

the

valve

shall

stay

in its

last

pos¡tion

in

all failure

cases,

including

electrical

and

air

pressure

failure.

The

electrical

failure

act¡on

shatl

normally

be

accomplished

by

the

provision

of

a

double-acting

actuator

using

separate

solenoids

for

each travel direction

and

a

neutral

míd-

position.

Single

press

or inching operation

shall

be

appropriately

actioned

by

the

logic

arrangement.

The

air

faílure

action

shall

be

accomplished

by

use

of

a lock-up

kit

acting

on

both sides

of

the

actuator. Alternative suitable systems

may be

offered

to

the

Company

for

approval.

5.12.7

Handwheels

Handwheels

for

globe,

butterfly

and

three-way

valves

shall

be

side

mounted,

lockable

and de-clutchable

and linked

in such

a

manner

that

the actuator

can

be

removed when

the

handwheel

is

engaged.

b.

The

operationalforce

required

shall

not

exceed

23 kgs

(50

lbs)

at

the

rim.

Ouarter-turn valves

using

linear

diaphragm

or

piston

actuators

may

utilize

handwheels

as

specified for

globe

valves,

or

alternative

arrangements

giving

equal

facilities.

The handwheel

may

be

detachable

where

permanent

fitting

is

impractical

or

undesirable.

A

suitably

designed

parking

place

shall

be

assigned

to

the removed

unit.

d.

Low-powered

electric

actuators up

to

113

Newton

Metre

{1000

inch

pounds)

torque

may

be

hand-positioned

directly

through

the

gearbox

shaft

by use

of

a

wrench

on

a

sguare-

ended

shaft.

Higher

powered types

require

a

handwheel

geared

down

to a

reasonable

torque

and

a

declutchable

or

w¡thdrawable

device

to

prevent

rotation

when

the motor

is

operating.

5.1

2.8

Solenoid

Valves

a

Solenoid

valves

shall

be direct

act¡ng,

spríng return

and of

robust

design

for

heavy

¡ndustrial

use.

The

coil

and spring

power

shall

be selected

to

provÍde

ample operational

force to

position

the

solenoid

correctly

under

all

applicable

service

conditions

and

air

pressures

up

to

11

.3

64

psig)

c

a

c

Sheet

41 of

163

Date

15-9.94

Rev

pecification

Numþer

015-JH-1903

Øf|f.'';gHYx,*ouP

'r/t

N1

2-0056

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 42/163

b. The operating

voltage

shall be

stated

in

the

Engineering

Group

Speciflcation entitled

lnstrument Design

(Number

015-JH-

1902).

The

solenoid

shall

generally

be

factory

mounted

to

the

valve,

and

where

this is not

possible

shall

be

tested

with

the

valve,

hooked

up

in

a

way

that

closely approximates

rhe final installed

situation.

d. Solenoids

for

fast action

ESD

service

shall

be

mounted

as

close

to

the actuator

port

as

possible,

quick

exhaust valves

shall

be

added

if

necessary

to

achieve

the

specified

closing time.

Solenoid

valves shall

not

be installed in signal lines

unless

they

are

for

control

services, e.9., injection

of a

pre-set

signal.

Solenoid valves

shall

not

be used

directly

in

process

lines

without

Company

approval.

Approval

shall

not

be

given

in the

case of shutdown

applications. These

services require

the

use

of a

valve with

limit switches

installed

to

prove

valve

status.

For

cases

where

a

solenoid

valve may

be

suitable

(e.9.,

tightness

testing

systems

in

clean

gases

which

are non-

corrosÍve

and

non-gumming

to the

valve

or

its

seals). The

Contractor

shall submit full detaíls

for

Company approvalof

the

proposed

application.

g.

Solenoids

shall

be certified for

use

in

the applicabte

hazardous

afea.

5.12.9

Limit Switches

a

Where

valve

limit

switches

are

required,

they

shall

be

of the

inductive

proximity

type

unless

modified

by the

Contract

documents.

b.

They

shall

be supplied

mounted in an

enclosure sealed

to lP

65. The

switch

box,

complete

with internally

adjustable

switch

actuators

shall be

mounted

on

the

valve yoke

and be

driven by

stainless steel linkages

and

shafts

properly

sealed for

use in

the

sandy environment.

The

switches

shall be terminated

within

the

enclosure, which

shall

have

overall hazardous

area certification

in

accordance

with

the

applicable

Contract-specified

execution

method.

5.12.10

Air

Filter

Regulator

Sets

a.

Each

valve

or

individual

instrurnent

air user

on

the

valve

shall

be fitted

with

an air

ser.

This

shall

c

an

air

regulator

c

e

f

ç

Sheet

42

ol 163

Date

15-9-94

Fevpecífication Number

01s-JH-1903

@ï0|,,';:m,Group

. i.

L.l

L

o

ú-

N12-0056

*

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 43/163

with

suitable

spring

range,

an

integral

filter and

drain

bowl

and

a S0-mm

(2-in.)

output

air

gauge.

b.

The

airset shall

generally

be

of

downstream relieving

type.

Spring

adjustment

shall be

by

hexagon

stainless

steel

screw

and

locknut,

The

port

s¡ze shall

be 1/4-in.

NpT.

5.13

Performance

Requirements_

5.13.1

Ouality

Control

(OC)

QC shall be

as

detailed in

the

Contract.

This

section

states

the

minimum

reguirements

directly related

to

control

valves

and

shall

not in

any way

replace

or

reduce

the

general

OA/OC

requirements.

b. The inspection

and

test

plan

shall include the

following

items

in

addition

to

those found

necessary

by

the Approved

Manufacturer

to

ensure

the

quality

of

the

product:

A

check

of

all

materials

of construct¡on by

cross-

comparing

the

goods,

the material

test

certificates

and

the

data

sheets

and Drawings.

2. A

check

of

the dimensions

of

the finished

valves

against

the

drawings

supplied

for the

Contract and

approved

by

the

Company.

3-

A

check of

the

completed

valve

and

all accessories

against

the

data sheet

and

specification requirements.

4.

A check of

the

valve

posit¡on

and

failure

arrangements

against the

data

sheet.

5. A

check

of

the

valve

plug

travel

against

the

approved

Drawings.

6.

A

check that

the valve

packing

and

gaskettlng

ís

¡n

accordance

with

the

data

sheets

and specifications.

7.

A

check

on

the valve nameplate

data

in

accordance

with

this

specification

and the

data

sheets and

Drawings.

L Full

lest¡ng

of

the

valve

in

accordance

with

this

specification,

the

Approved

Manufacturer's

additional

OA

procedures

and

the

approved

test and

inspection

plan,

a

1

Sheet

43

of

163

Data

1 5-9-94

Rev

pecification

Number

01s-JH-1903

@tíÏlY: ix,**

N12-0056

rlt

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 44/163

(

9. A check on the

valve

and

accessor¡es

paint¡ng

and

protect¡on

and

general

suitability for the

environment,

10. A check on

the

tagging

being

in

accordance

with

this

specification

and

the data

sheets.

5.1

3.2

Valve Testíng

Non-destruct¡ve test¡ng

(NDTI

frequencies,

types

and

methods

shall be specified

by

the

Approved

Manufacturer

in

accordance

with

the

Contract OAiOC

specifícations,

All

tests

shall

be listed

in

the

inspection

and

test

plan

and

submitted

to

fhe

Company

for

approval.

b,

The following standard

performance

tests shall

be

performed:

Valve

hydrostatic

pressure

test, conducted according

to

ANSI B 16.34

and

B

16.37.

2.

Seat

leakage

test

for

valves

class lV

and

above,

in

conformity to

ANSI

Bl

6-104. Air

and de-mineralized water

shall

be

used

as the

respective

phase

fluids.

Valves

of

lower

sealing

rat¡ngs

shall

only be checked

to

confirm

the

actuator

can

operate against the design fluid

pressure.

Prove

that

the actuator

will

open

against

the

desÍgn

fluid

pressure

in the

case of

flow

over

plug

and

quarter-turn

valves.

4.

Confirm

valve

speed of

travel

over

the

full

stroke

is

in

accordance

with

the data

sheet. Also

check

stroke

linearity

wíth

increasing

and decreasing

input

signal.

5. Perform

hysteresis

check.

Sensitivity

shall

be

based

on a

proven

or observed valve

movement

when

the

signal

is

changed

by O.O2 barg

(O.3

psig).

The

test

shall

be

conducted

tn

2Qo/a

steps

from 1

Oo/o lo 9O7o

of

valve

travel,

in

both

directions.

6.

Perform response

check.

When

the

sígnal

is

changed

by

1Oo/o,

the valve

shall

start

to move

without

perceptible

delay.

Total

signal response

times

in

excess

of

4

seconds

for

the

10%

change

are

to be submitted

to

the

Company

for

approval

for

the

specific

application.

The

test will not

apply

at the fully

open

and

fully

closed

positions.

5.13.3

Actuator

Testing

ct

1

3

a

The actuator

shal

be

tested

'

ffiþ¡e

varve,

Sheet

44

of 163

Dats

15-9-94

Rev

pecificatíon Number

015-JH-1903

Øïtf,wx,Group

ú.,

*

N't

2-0056

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 45/163

(

b.

The

díaphragm

case

shall

be

tested

for

leakages. The

test

shall

be conducted

at 3 barg

(45

psig),

or

at

the

higher

level

at

which

the

actuator is

specified

to

operate. The

test shall

be

successful if no

leakage

is detected

over

a

3-minute

period

around

the

diaphragm

case

bolts,

periphery

of

the

diaphragm

and

at

the

breathing side

of the

diaphragm.

c.

For

push-up

actuators with

packing

at

the shaft seal,

the

leakage

test shall be additionally

applied

around

the

shaft

at

several

positions

of stroke.

5.13.4 Certification

All

the

certif¡cat¡on

for

each

valve

or

group

of

valves

shall

be

collated

in

a

Valve

Data Book whích

shall be

available

at

final

inspection.

The

book

shall inctude

as a

minimum:

a.

Completed

test

and

inspection

plan.

b.

Material

certificates

and

component

test certificates.

c,

NDT

certificates.

d. Weld

procedures

and

qualificat¡ons.

e.

Pressure

test

certificate.

f.

Leakage

test

certif¡cate.

g.

Vafve

and

actuator

performance

test

certificate.

Actual

recorded figures

to

be added

during

the test.

h. Hazardous

area

certificates.

i. As-built

Drawings

as

necessary.

5.14

Nameolate Dptq

General

information

for

production

of

the nameplate

data

is

given

in

section

4.7

of this specifícation,

¡nstrument

ldentification.

Addit¡onally,

for

valves,

the

following information

is

required:

a,

Valve serial

number.

Valve model

or catalogue

number

Body

material.

Body

rating

and size.

b

c

d

Sheet

45

of 163

Date

1

5-9-94

Rev

pecification

Number

01

s-JH-1903

@l,ll':,:mx:-

l

r

I

E

d

Nt 2-0056

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 46/163

1.

Maloperation

Control

failure

resulting

in

excessive

pressure

build-up

due

to malfunction

in

temperature

or

fluid

control

into

or

out

of

a

vessel

or

protected

system.

2.

Fire

Case

Overheating

of

a

vessel or

piping

system

due to

an

external

fire

or

source

of

heat.

6.0

e.

Trim

material

or

specification

number,

f.

Trim

size.

g.

Trim CV

rating.

h.

Trim

characteristic.

i,

Stem

travel

in mm.

i.

Action

air

to close or

air

to

open.

RELIEF

AND

SAFETY

VALVES

6.1

ApolicableStandards

ANSI B

16.5

Steel

Pipe

Flanges

and

Flanged

Fittings

ANSI B

1.2O.1

Pipe Threads

API RP

52O

Sizing,

Selection

and

lnstallat¡on.

of

Pressure

Relieving

Devices

in

Refineries

API

RP

521

Guide

for

Pressure

Relieving and Depressurisíng

Systems

API

Std

526

Flanged

Steel

Safety

Hetief Valves

API

Std 527

Commercial

Seat

Tightness for

Safety

Relief

Valves

with

Metal-to-Metal

Seats

6.2

Scope

of

Relief

Valve

Section

6.2.1

Cases

This

specification

covers

all systems

of

pressure

relief

for the

following

relief

cases:

a

Sheet

46

of

163

Date

15-9-94

Revpecification

Number

015-JH-1903

@l0c

'åt:åHx,êroup

,/'

ii

Nl

2-0056

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 47/163

b.

All

pressure

relief

valves

on

critical

service

(excluding

th

relief) shall be

supplied

with

an installed spare

equally

relÍef

valve.

3.

Thermal

Overload

Liquid

relief

of

pressure

build

up

in a

system

that

¡s

blocked in due to receiving heat

input from

the

surrounding

ambient

conditions

or

from equipment

in

the

line.

b.

The

most

severe

of the

applicable cases

shall

be

taken

for

design

purposes,

The

cases

shall

not

be

additive.

6.2.2

Relief

Devices

This specification

covers

mechanical

devices such as

relief and

safety

valves,

thermal

relief

valves

and bursting

discs.

Other

devices

may

be necessary

for special

process

conditions, e.9., U-

type

blow-out

wet

legs.

The

use

of

any

such device shall

be

approved

by

the

Company

before adoption.

6.2.3

Redundancy

Twin or

multiple

safety

valve

systems shall

be supplied

if

requÍred

by

vessel codes, the

P&lD

or

detailed

analysis

of

the

process

system.

a

6.2.4

lsolating Valves

Where

relief valves

are 1OO7o spared,

the inlet and outlet

l¡nes

will be

provided

with

interlocked

isolation valves

to

ensure

one

valve is

on-line

when

the

other is off-line. The

interlocking

isolation valves

shall have the ability 1o

be

padlocked

to

prevent

unauthorised

operation.

The

off-line relief

valve

shall be

able

to be removed for

servicing.

b.

lsolation

valves

where

fitted

for

other

relief valves

shall

be

full-

bore

roddable

type

and

f¡tted

with

a locked open facility.

6.3

Relief

Aoplica.tions

and

Selection

6.3.1 Normal

Case

The

selected

relief

valve

for

the

standard

application shall be;

1.

Full lift,

snap

action

with

enclosed

spring.

a

a

2.

Flanged

connectí

side.

ons,

minimum

ç

,F

ated

inlet

T

&

on

the

Specification

Number

01s-JH-1903

@tí01,;y*xx,Group

Shsot

47

of

163

Date

r

5-9-94

Rev

I

d,

ú

12-0056

4

'<1

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 48/163

i

3.

Bolted bonnet.

4, Screwed

cap.

5.

Full

one-piece

nozzle,

b.

Liquid relief valves

for service

on

systems

such

as

pump

outlets,

where snap-act¡on

valves

are

inadvisable,

shall

be

proportional

types.

Liquid

thermal

relief valves

(size

3/4-in.x

1-in.)

shall

be

of

screwed

construction

{except

when

required

for

NACE

service}

with

semi-nozzle.

d.

Large

relief valves

(6-in.

and

above)may

use

inlet flanges

rated

at

150 LB

when

the

process

conditions

allow.

e.

The relief

valves

shall

be

sized

to

API RP

52O,

designed

and

constructed

in

accordance

with

API

RP 526

and be

tested

to

API

RP 521.

They shall

be

furnished

with type

approvaltesting

./,

conforming

to the

Vessel

design

code,

and

where

the

applicable

ft\

vessel

is

supplied

with

a

code

stamp,

then

relief

valves

snat//V

also be code

stamped.

\\il,t

\,: .\

High

Temperatures

\t

High-temperature

valves

shall

use

exposed springs. The Approved

Manufacturer

recommendations

for

the

valve

design

and

packing

shall be

followed.

6.3.3 Back

Pressure

Applications

Valves

of

balanced bellows design

shall

be

used

for

the

following

applications:

1.

Where

the

built-up back

pressure

due

to

downstream

piping,

silencers

and

fittings

exceeds

1O%

of the valve set

pressure.

2.

For a

constant

back-pressure

application where

the

sum

of

the valve and

piping

accumulation

and the constant

back

pressure

would

result

in

an over-pressure

of

the

vessel.

3.

Where an

imposed

back

pressure

is

not

constant

and

the

variations

can

exceed 5o/o

of the

valve

set

pressure.

4. Where

savings in

the

downstream

dísposal

piping

can

be

made because

of

the

incre

le

piping

accumulation and

back-pressure

c

6.3.2

a

Shaot

48

of 163

Date

15.9-94

Rev

pecification

Numþe¡

01s-JH-1903

Ølr0l,';wx,GrcuP

i.

N1

2-OO56

t//

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 49/163

l-l

-Lr

)t-

o

ú

6,3.4

Pilot-OperatedSystems

a

Pilot-operated systems

shall

be

considered for

the following

applications:

1 Where

automat¡c

de-pressurisation

is

required

in

addition

to

over-pressure

protection.

2. Where

valve

simmer

could

be

a

problem,

to enable short

relieving

periods

with

small

differentials and

tight

shutoff.

3. Where

set

pressure

is within

10% of

operating

pressure.

4.

¡nstallations

requiring

the valve

to

be

tested when installed

and

under

pressure.

5. High-volume

relief.

6. Economic

considerations

for

larger

valves,

4-in.x

6-in, and

above.

7.

Other

applicatÍons

which

are

difficult

or

impractical

with

conventional

relief

valves.

b.

All

pilot-operated

systems

shall

be

provided

with

dual

pilots

arranged

so

that

either

pilot can be

maintained and

tested

while the other is in service.

6.3.5

Bellows

Seals

Where

the

service requires

absolute security

of the

seal between

the

relief

disc

shaft

and

the

bonnet,

bellows

seals

shall be fitted.

Applications

include

corrosive,

hazardous

and lethal

substances

which

have special relief disposal

conditions.

6.3.6

Rupture

Discs

Rupture

discs

as a

sole protection

for

plant safety

shall

only

be

used

with

Company approval.

b. Rupture

discs may be

fitted

upstream of

a relief valve

in

corrosive or

particulate

service

or

where

the

valve

operation

could be affected

adversely

by

contact with

the

process.

The

following

considerations shall apply:

Nozzle

flushing, if required for

particulate

service,

shall

use

fluids compatible

with

the

line fluids. The

flushing

system

shall

be independently

protected

against over-pressure.

a

1

@ïrff

'{,Y::í:JH,GrouP

Sheet

49

of

163

Date

1 5-9-94

Rev

pecification

Number

o1s-JH-1903

l2-0056

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 50/163

(

\

2. Disc

fracture

detection shall be installed

for

each

application.

This

shall

be

independent

of

the

relief

valve

actuation.

When

lS

techniques

are

being used, the

method

for

non-conductive fluids

is

by

use

of

an

efectrical contact

which

breaks to

alarm

at the

DCS

when a

frangible

element

on

the

downstream disc surface

is

broken

as

the

disc

ruptures.

When non-lS systems are specified or the

fluid is

conductive, a bleed shall be

¡nstalled

on the

space

between

the

disc

and

the

relief

valve.

This

shall

be

routed

to

the

relief

system

downstream

of the relief

valve.

The

bleed

piping

shall

incorporate a

restriction

orifice

sized

at

3.00

mm

(1/,

in.¡

and

an excess flow

check

valve

as

necessary.

The

bleed

shall

be monitored

by

a

pressure

gauge and pressure

switch

on

the high

pressure side

of the

restriction,

to

detect

and

alarm to

the

DCS

any

fracture

of

the

disc.

c.

All

rupture

discs

shall

be

manufactured

in

batches

using

the

same

plate

material.

At feast

three

discs

shall

be

press

ruptured

to confirm

the

calibration.

Each

fitted dísc shall

supplied

with

two spares

from

the

same

batch.

6.4

izing

Requirements

6.4.1

Control

of

Design

Data

Valves

shall

be

sized

on the basis

of

defined

issues

of

the

process

data

sheets,

P&lD,

equipment and

piping

data. A document control

shall

be

maintained

to

ensure

that

the

valves

are built

to

the latest

case

evaluat¡on

and calculation,

based

on the final data.

Data

sheets

shall

state

the

process

data

revision

number,

and

calculations

the data

sheet revision

number.

6.4.2

Lim¡ting

Case

The

valve

data sheet shall specify the selected

case,

all

applicable vessel and

process

conditions, the

constant,

variable

and

built-up

downstream

pressures

and

the

allowable

noise

level.

b. Silencing

where

necessary

shall

be

purchased

with

the

valve,

and

the

back-pressure

caused shall

be

included

in

the

calculation.

Where

a

number

of

process

conditions

and/or

choices

of

applicable case

exist,

sufficient calculations

shall

be

performed

to ensure that the

limiting

case

and

conditions

are

selected

as

the

design

case.

a

c

@lt0f,';tgx,*ouP

Sheet

50 of 163

Date

15-9-94

Rev

pecification

Number

015-JH-1903

N12-OO56

Yf

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 51/163

I

6.4.3

6.4.4

d. Regardless

of the

accumulatìon value,

the

relief

valve setting

shall

not

be greater

than

the

vessel design

pressure.

Calculation

Required

a.

The calculation

shall

be

conducted

in

accordance

with

API

RP

520

or

to

the

code

dictated

by

the

vessel

design

code and

shall

be

submítted

to Company for approval

before

purchase.

b.

The

calculation

shall

tabulate:

1.

Valve

tag number.

2.

System and

equipment

protected.

3.

Cases

applicable

and the selected

case.

4.

Relief

loads for

each

of the

applicable

cases.

5.

Blowdown

restrictions

and calculated

figure.

6.

Type

of

valve,

e.9.,

proportionâ|,

balanced

bellows

etc.

7.

Body

and inlet

and outlet flange

sizes and

ratings.

8.

Pipeivessel line

specification, line

number and

sizes.

9.

Back-pressure

force

at

full relief.

10. Operating

setting and

the

cold

setting, both at

the

Approved

Manufacturer's

test

facility

and the

Company

and

the

Contractor's Site workshops. The

calculations

shall

take

into

account the

different

ambient

pressures

and

temperatures.

1

1.

Valve

capacíty

at

relieving

conditions.

Blowdown

a.

The blowdown for

spring operated

valves

shall

be as

follows:

1

Valves

of set

pressure

7.0

barg

(lO0

psígl

and

tess:

valve

shall

re-seat

at

not

less

than 0.14

barg

(2

psig)

below

the

set

pressure,

lower

limit

set

by

process

requirement

(normally

5% below set

pressure).

2.

Valves

of

set

pressure

over

7.0

barg

11

0O

psig):

valve

shall

re-seat

at

not

set

pressure.

less

than

2o/o

ot

an

7o/o

below

the

//^

M?

tii

Date

1

5-9-S4

Rev

Sheet

51

of

163

Specification

Number

o15-JH-1903

@1,01##Yx, -*

:*

s

o

ú

*

Nt

2-0056

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 52/163

b.

Pilot-operated

valves

shall

conform

to

the

above criteria

or

have defined

limits set

according

to

the

process conditions.

6.4.5

Limits on

Valve

Selection

a

The minimum

size

shall be

1-in.

x

2-in. except for

thermal

relief

valves

{TSV).

b.

The

area

of discharge of

flanged

valves

operating at set

pressures

over

19

barg

(276

psig)

shall

be

not

less

than

four

times the

area of the

nozzle,

The

area

of

discharge

shall apply

to any

point

in

the

valve

downstream

of

the nozzle,

including

the

discharge

flange

opening.

c

The

selected

orifice

size shall exceed

the

calculated

area

only

by

an

amount

as limited by

standard

orifices

avaílable.

d.

The

valve shall

be

selected

at such a

size

that a

larger

orifice

may

be

fitted

at a

later

date

to

accommodate

process

chan

An

allowance of

107 increase

of

flow

shall

be

pos

wìthout

increasing

the

overall

accumulation.

e A minimum

number

of

valves

shall

be

used

in

multiple

valve

applications.

Mixed

orifice

sizes

are

not

acceptable.

6.5

Desígn. Materials

and

Construction

6.5.1 Lifting

Levers

Lifting

levers

shall

be

installed

only

on

air, nitrogen

or

low-pressure

steam

service

or

where

dictated by

the

vessel

design

code.

6.5.2 Shipping/TestGags

Gags

shall be fitted to all

valves

except

thermal

relief

valves.

6.5.3

Code

Requirements

ct

The relief valves

shall be designed and

constructed

within

the

applícable

vessel

design code.

b.

Where

a code

is

not

stipulated,

the

valves

shall

conform

to

the

ASME

code

for

Section

Vlll,

Dív

l.

This requirement

shall

not

apply

to

thermal

relief valves for

pipingiequipment

service only.

c

Sheet

52

of

163

Date

15-9-94

Revpecification

Number

015-JH-1903

Øfrïli*mfrcuP

d,

  t

2-0056

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 53/163

6.5.4

Connections

a. Bodies shall

be

flanged

(except

thermal

relief

valves) to

ANSI

816.5,

rated and

faced

in

accordance

with the

vessel/piping

specifications.

b. The flanges

shall

be

forged integrally

with

the

body.

Welded-on

flanges

are

not

acceptable,

Welded

¡n

safety

valves

are

not

allowed.

Where

valves

shall be

installed on fulfy

welded

systems,

the Contractor

shall

submit

an

alternative

flange

system, suitable

for

the

process

conditions,

for

Company

approval.

d. Screwed

valves

(3/4-in.

x 1-in.)

for

thermal

relief

shall

have

threads

formed

in

accordance

with

ANSI

Bl

.2AJ.

6.5.5

Body

and

Flange

Ratings and

Material

a

The normal

materials

shall

be carbon

steel

bodies

with stainle

steel

trim.

The

trim

shall

include:

1.

The

nozzle.

2.

The

disc

and

disc

holder.

3.

The stem and

guide.

4,

The blowdown

ring,

ring

pin

and

bushing.

5.

All other

parts

contacting

the

inlet

side

process

fluid.

b.

The

body

may be

cast

or

forged.

c.

The

bonnet

shall

be

of

the

sarne material as

the

body.

d,

Altthe

trim

components shall be renewable.

e. The

nozzle

and

disc

shall

be

of

forged material.

f

.

All

materials shall

be

upgraded

as

necessary

to suit

the actual

service

rating.

g.

Valves

of

lightweight

pattern

are

not

permitted.

The

inlet

side of all

relief

valves

(flange,

nozzle,

disc

and

seàt)

shall be

rated equal

to

the

pressure

temperature

rating

of

the

inlet

flange.

The

outlet side

of

all relief

valves

(flange,

body,

bonnet,

packing

etc.)

shall

be

equal

to the

pressure

temperature

rating

of

the

piping class

flange.

c

@tíïlïotå#:x:**

Date

1

5-9-94

Rev

peciflcation

Number

01

s-JH-1903

Sheet

53

of 163

,rl,

12-0056

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 54/163

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 55/163

6.5.9

Bellows

Where

the

service

requires

bellows seals to be f¡tted,

the

minimum

material

requirement

is stainless steel.

6.5.1O

ln-Llne Testing

The

stem shall be

suitably extended

ând

threaded

to allow the

installation

of

in-line,

on stream

testing

machinery.

6.6 Noise

The noise

emitted by a

single

relief

valve

at maximum

operation shall

exceed

105

dB

A

or

any

lower

figure stated

in the

Engineering

Specification

entitled

Plant/Equipment Noise

Control

(Number

O

1104).

The

Contractor shall

state

the

predicted

noise

spectrum

on

sheets

submitted

for

approval

to the Company.

6.7

lnstallat¡on

N.gtes

6.7.1

Each relief valve

shall be

¡nstalled,

wíth

the spring

vertical,

in

a

pos¡t¡on

accessible

for inspection

and maintenance,

but shall

be

clear of

walkways

where

relief

noise

could be

a

hazard

to

operating

personnel.

6.7.2

The

pÍping and

supporting

shall

be

designed

to

withstand

the valve

back

pressure

forces

at full relief. The valve

shall

not

be

used to

support

the

downstream

piping

(except

abbreviated vent legs)

or

silencers.

6.7.3

Vent legs

shall be

positíoned

so as

not to

cause

any

hazard

tb

personnel

or equipment

while

the

valve is

relieving.

6.7.4

Vertical

vent

legs

shall be

provided

with

a

drain

hole

to

prevent

water

build-up

in the

leg.

Heat

tracing shall be fitted as necessary

in

sub-zero service

conditions to avoid

icing

in

the

discharge

piping.

For large

relief valves,

a

permanent

lifting

facility

shall

be

installed

for

servicing and removal

of

the

valve.

6.8

Performance Reouirements

6.8.1

Ouality

Control

(OC)

a

OC

shall

be as detailed in the

Contract. This

section states

the

minimum

additional requirements

related

to

relief

valves

only

and shall not in

any

way

replace

or

reduce

the

general

OA/OC

requirements,

6.7.5

Sheet

55 ot

163

Date

15-9-94

Rev

pecification Number

01

s-JH-1903

@ï|Jf;y*w,Group

N 1

2-0056

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 56/163

shall be

reduced

if

there

is

a design

restrict¡on

on

back

pressure

on

the

outlet

side

of

the

nozzle.

b.

The

inspection

and

test

plan

shall

include

the

following

checks

in

addition

to

those

found

necessary

by

the

Approved

Manufacturer to

ensure

the

quality

of

the

product:

A check

of all

materials

of construction

by

cross-

comparing

the

goods,

the

material

test certificates and the

data

sheets

and

Drawings.

2. A check of

the

dimensions of

the tinished

valves

against

the

Drawings

supplied

for the

Contract

and approved by

the

Company.

3.

A

check of

the

completed vâlve and all accessories

against

the

data

sheet and

specification

requirements.

4.

A

check

on

the

valve

nameplate

data ¡n

accordance

this

specification

and

the data

sheets and

Drawings.

5.

Full

testing of

the

valve

in

accordance

with th

specification,

the

Approved

Manufacturer's

additional

OA/OC

procedures

and the

approved

test

and inspection

plan.

6. A

check

on

the

valve

and

accessories

painting

and

protect¡on

and

general

suitability

for

the

environment.

A

check

on

the

tagging being

in

accordance with this

specification and

the

data

sheets.

6.8.2

Casting

Quality

Castings

shall

be

true

to form

and

free

from

shrinkage

defects,

strains,

scales,

lumps,

sand holes,

or

other

defects.

6.8.3

Testing

The

nozzle

and body shall

be

hydrostatically

tested

before

assembly

at

1.5

times the

respective ratings

of

the inlet

and

outlet

flanges.

b. The valve

shall

be

calibrated

by

popping

pneumatically

at

the

cold differential

test

pressure

calculated

for

the

conditions

prevailing

at the

testing

workshop.

The

valve

shall be

pressure

tested

as

an

assembly at

no greater

than

1

.5

times

the

rating

of the

outlet flange,

but this

figure

1

7

a

c

Sheet

56 of

163

@ï,|JW,#:x, -*

Date

15-9-94

Rev

pecification

Number

01s-JH-1903

N 1

2-0056

rl

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 57/163

d.

The valve

shall be

tested

for

leakage

across the

seat

by

a

procedure

in

accordance

with

API

RP-527.

Tests

to

 commercial

standard

are

acceptable for non-hazardous

service.

Valves

for

hydrocarbons

and

corrosive

substances

shall be

bubble

t¡ght.

6.8.4

Documentafion

All

the certification

for

each

valve or

group

of valves shall

be

collated

in

a

Valve

Ðata Book

which

shall be available

at

f¡nal

inspection.

The

book shall include

as a

minimum:

a. Completed

test

and

inspection

plan.

b. Material

certificates

and

component

certificates,

c.

NDT

certificates.

d.

Weld

procedures

and

qualifications.

e.

Pressure

test certificates.

f. Leakage

test

cert¡ficates.

g.

Relief

set

pressure

certificate.

h. As-built

Drawings

as

necessary.

6.9

Namenlate

Data

General

ìnformation for

production

of the

nameplate data

is

given

in section

4,7

of

this

specification, lnstrument ldentification.

Additionally, for relief

valves, the

following

information

is

required:

a.

Body material .

b.

Trim

material.

c.

Rating

of inlet

and

outlet flange

(nozzle

and

body).

d.

Nozzle

size

or

number.

e.

Set

pressure.

t.

Cold

set

pressure.

g.

Spring

number

and

spring

range.

Ølr0l';*m^GrcuP

Sheet

57

of

163

Date

15-9-94

Rov

pecification Nurnber

01s-JH-',t903

N12.OOs6

rr,

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 58/163

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 59/163

Þ

*

,r

t-

ô'

d.

lnstruments

used

on

feedback

control

are required

to

give

a

repeatable

and

correctly

characterized signal throughout

the

range,

of

sufficient

accuracy

to control the

plant

and

provide

a

proper

level

of equipment

performance

information

to

the

operator.

Certain relaxations

on

the accuracy

conditÍons

can be

submitted

for

Company

review

and

comment.

7,3.2

lnstrurnent

Type

a For

all applications

other

than fiscal, the

standard selection

of

instrument wherever

process

conditions

allow

shall be

the

square-edged,

concentric-orifice

plate

with

flange

taps

and

a

dÍfferential

pressure

transmitter.

b.

Corner

taps and other

entrance

forms

shall

be

used

10

overcome

high

viscosity, low DP, high

Reynolds

numbers

etc.

within

the calculation

requirements

of

ISO

5167.

Pipe

taps shall

be

used

where

back-flushed

chemical seals are

reguired,

for

services such as

viscous,

corrosive

or

particulate

service.

d. Conical

entrance

or

quarter-circle

orifice

plates

shall be

used to

measure

high-velocity liquids

or slurries.

e

Segmental

or

eccentric-orifice plates shall be

used

on

liquids

containing

large

amounts of solids.

f.

Critical

flow

orifices

with

upstream

pressure

gauge

shall

be

used

to measure

stripping

steam

flow.

The

upstream

pressure

must

be

greater

than twice

the

downstream

pressure

throughout

the

range.

ïhe

pressure gauge

shall be

scaled

in

flow

units.

g.

Fabricated

metering runs

shall be used

for

line

sizes

2

in.

and

below.

Sizes

smaller

than 2 in.

shall

only be

used

if

it

can be

shown

that

swaging

up

to

2

in.

is

not

viable. Vent

and drain

holes shall

not

be

used

on

orifice

plates

fitted

into

metering

rUNS.

h. Where

low

pressure

loss

is

essential,

venturi

or

flow

tube

(Dall)

type

meters shall be

used.

i. Where no

appreciable

pressure

loss

can

be

tolerated,

pitot

and

annubar tubes shall

be

used

on

clean

service

only, These shall

be

of

the

retractable under

pressure

type

unless

the

line

can

be

isolated

without

local

or

complete shutdown. These

instruments

shall

not

be

used on lines subject to scrap¡ng.

I,

{t:;

lio.

\

c

Sheet

59

of

'1

63

Specification

Number

01s-JH-1903

@lr0l#;x,GrouP

Date

15-9-94

Rev

N

1

2-0056

(t

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 60/163

For

small

rates

of

flow

such

as

samples

for

analysers,

variable

area meters shall

be

used. For purging

flow,

variable

area

meters

with

a constant

flow

regulator

and

a

low-flow

alarm

shall be

used.

k.

Sight

glasses

shall

only

be used

at atrnospheric

pressure,

on oil

and water

flows

to

machinery,

where

the

lack

of a

flow

will

cause

an

alarm from

another measurement

before

any injurious

result

could

arise.

l.

Totalizing

shall be

performed

in

the

DCS

or

long-term

storage

and reporting computer

systems.

Should

the

Company

specifically

require

local

totalizing

instruments,

these

shall

be

positive

displacement,

with

or

without

local

temperature

compensation according

to

the

process

conditions.

rn

Except

where

the

Company has

specified

a

partícular

type

instrument, a

written

application

for

each

unusual case

shall

b

made

to

the

Company

justifying

the

selection

of

such

ot

devices

as:

1.

Vortex

flow.

2. Turbine

meters.

3.

EleCtromagnetíc

flowmeters

4.

Ultrasonic

flowmeters.

5- Positive dísplacement

flowmeters

6. Target-type

flowmeters.

7.

Thermal-type

ffowmeters.

8.

Coríolis-type

mass

flowmeters.

L

lnsertion meters

(of

any

typel.

Flow

elements which

may

endanger

downstream

equiprnent

due

to

possible

loss

of

mechanical

components

upon

failure

shall

not

be offered,

e.g.,

insertion

turbine

meter

in

a

compressor inlet.

o

lntegral

orifice

instruments

shall

be

avoided

unless

this

type is

specifically

identified

on the

P lD

as

the Company

requirement

n

Sheet

60 of

163

Date

15-9-94

|

Rov

pecification

Number

015-JH-1903

@l0l';Y'wx,GtouP

i

N1

2-0056

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 61/163

7.3.3

Local

lndication

of

Flow

a

Local flow

indication

for

gases,

liquids

and

steam

shall

be by

use of

an

orifice

plate,

a

pneumatic

or

electronic

differential

pressure

transmitter

and

a

receiving

pressure

gauge

or series

connected electronic

indicator.

When

the electronic

transmítter

also serves a DCS

indicator

or

is

part

of

a control loop,

a

re-

transmitted signal

from

the

DCS

shall

be

used

instead

of

a

series

connection

in the

field,

b. Variable

area,

positive

displacement

and

other

instrument

types

may

be

used

within

the

llmitations

stated in

the

preceding

sections.

7.3.4

Flow

Measurement

for Remote

Control or

lndication

a.

Remote

transmission

shall

be

by use

of

an

orifice

plate

and

an

electronic

differential

pressure

transm¡tter.

b.

All

transmitters shall

have

an

integral

signal

indicator

with

a

scale

characterístic

the

same

as

the

output.

c.

Turbine

meters shall

be considered where

high

accuracy or high

turndown is

required,

subject

to

Company

approval,

d.

other

¡nstrurnent

selections

may be made

within the

lim¡tat¡ons

stated above.

7.3.5

Alarms

and

Trips

a.

Alarms

lntermediate

and

pre-alarms

shall

be

generated

in

the

DCS from

the

transmitter

signal

that

is used

for

control

and

indication.

Magnetic

or

proximity

switches on

varíable

area

{VA}

meters

shall

only

be

used

on non-hazardous

service

and

require

Company approval.

ln-line

flow

switches shall

not

be

used

except where

specifically required

or

approved

by

the

Company.

b.

Trips

For

applications where

the

detect¡on

of

high-high

or

low-low

tr¡p is

required

for

general

or local

shutdown,

a separate

transmitter is

required,

with

a high

integrity

control

room

mounted

trip

amplifier

to

provide

the

switching

action.

High

and

low

trip may

be

provided

¡t

is

in range.

generated

fro

e

transmitter

Sheet

61 of

163

Date

'|

5-9-94

Rev

pecification

Number

o15-JH-1903

@frÏl,'{, #"H,G'louP

N1

2-00s6

,/'

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 62/163

(

c

ln

the case

of orifice

meters,

the

same

orifice

plate

and flange

set shall

be used

for

all

transmitters, but

each

instrument

shall

have

its own

isolation

valve.

7.3.6 Local

Flow

Control

a

Where

local

flow control

is

specified,

generally

an

orifice

plate

and

pneumatic

differential

pressure

transmitter

with

local

receiver

controller

shall

be

used. Other forms

of

DP

primary

element

may

be

used

within

the

limitations

stated

in

this

specification.

b.

VA

meters

fitted

with

constant

flow

regulators

may

only

be

used

for

fixed rate

flows

such

as

flushing

and

purging.

A

flow alarm shall always

be

fitted.

7.4

Sizino

and

Ranging

Requirements

7.4.1

Differential

Pressure¡nstruments

a Orifice

plates

used

on differential

pressure

flo

measurement

installations

shall be sized

to

ISO 5167.

Computer

input

and

output

data

is

required

for Company

review.

Sizes below

5O

mm

(2

in.)

not

covered

by

ISO

5'167

shall

be

calculated

in

accordance

with the

Approved

Manufacturer's

proven

system.

Corner

taps

are required

on

small

lines.

b. Meter

maximum

used

in flow

calculations

shall

be

taken

as

2Ùo/o

above

maximum

design

flow

rate.

c

For

feedback control,

flow

rate

turndown

for

an orifice

plate

fitted

with

a single

conventional

electronic

transmitter

shall

not be

greater

than

3:1.

The

transmitter

span

shall

be

selected

so

that

the

turndown is

w¡thin

the capsule

range

limits

(normally

6:11.

Smart transmitters

may

be

used

to

the

Approved

Manufacturer's

recommended

turndown,

but

not

greater

than

1O:1.

Range

increases

by

change of

orifice

plate

shall

only be

allowed

when

specifically

requested

by

the

Company,

and

only

when

senior/junior

type

fittings are

used.

d. For

flow

rates

up

to

(but

not exceeding)

10:1

two

conventional

(i.e.,

non-smart)

transmitters

may

be used.

The

first

transmitter

shall

be

ranged

to

approximately 351 of

range

(to

the

nearest sensible

unitl

and

the second shall

be

ranged

1007o. Transfer shall be

bumpless.

e

For

mass

balance

and

long-te

d

reporting

e

ranging

omputer

purposes,

due

regard

@|ffi

TolJffJH,n**

Sheet

620f163

Date

15-9-94

Rav

pecification

Number

015-JH-1903

N12-0056

d'

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 63/163

of the

primary

element

as

well

as

the

transmítter capability

before

choosing

overall

acceptable

ranges

within

the

accuracy

required.

f .

Mass flow

measurement

shall be based on

differential

pressure

or

volumetric

measurernent supplemented by

other

measurement

corrections

(e.9.,

pressure

and temperature).

Temperature,

pressure

or

density correction

shall

be

used as

specìfìed/agreed

to

with

the

Company.

g.

Where

a

transmitter

is

in

a

low-low

or

high-high

detection

service only,

it

may

be ranged at 5O% of

the

range

of

the

control

transmÍtter.

h.

Corrections

shall

not

normally be applied

to trip

instruments

unless

they

are

essential

for

safe detection of the out-of'lirnit

cond¡tion.

i. Differential

pressure

transrnitters

shall be

ranged for

a

scale different¡al

ot

254 mbar

(1OO

ins WGI

where

possible.

Alternative

ranges may

be selected

from the

tabl

below:

(20O

ins

WG)

0O

mbar

(4O

ins

WG)

OO

mbar

(20

ins

WG)

O mbar

j.

Other

ranges may

be used subject

to

Company approval.

k.

The

following

rules

shall

be

followed:

The

minimum

orificesize

shall

be

I

mm

(1/3

in.),

(3

mm

(1/8

in.)

for restriction orifices) unless approved

otherwise

by

the

Company.

2.

The

calculated

d/D

rat¡o

(Beta

ratio)

for

square-edged

orifice

plates

shall be

within

the

range

0.4

to

0.70

for

new

equipment.

For

pfant

modification

or

except¡onal

cases, both

subject

to

approval

by

the

Company,

rat¡os

between

O.25

and 0.75 are acceptable. lf rhe

initially

calculated

beta ratio

exceeds

A.7 for

a 500

mbar

(2O0

ins WG) DP

transmitter

range,

the

line

shall be swaged

up

for the

meter¡ng

length

as

necessary.

3.

The beta ratio

for

conical

entrance

plates

shall

not

exceed 0.3, and for

quarter

circle ll not

exceed

O.6

1

Sheet

63

ol

163

Date

1

5-9-94

Rev

pecification

Number

o1s-JH-1903

@fiffi',,.,{ ::H,GrouP

t

12-0056

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 64/163

7.4.2

VA

Meters

VA

meters

shall

be

sized

with sufficient

capacity

to

absorb

líne

fluctuations

such

as

opening

of

manual valves

etc.

lnternal

spring

buffers

and

other

protection

as

necessary

shall

be

fitted

to

prevent

damage to

the operat¡ng

element.

7.4.3 Turbine, Positive

Displacement

(PD)

and

Other

Specific

Types of

Meter

Turbine and PD

meters

shall

be sized

according

to

the

Approved

Manufacturer's

recommendations

and

ranges

shall

be

dependant

on

flow

rates

and

service

conditions.

7.5

Construction

Requirement$

7.5.1

General

All

ffowmeters

shall

have

a

positive

rneans

of

identifying

the

direction

of flow.

7.5.2 Orifice

Plates

a

Orifice

plates

shall

be

manufactured in

accotdance

with

the

dimensions

and

tolerances

given

in

ISA

RP

3.2,

Flange-

Mounted

Sharp-Edged

Orifice

Plates

for

Flow

Measurement

or

API

RP

55O,

Part l.

b.

The

standard

orifice

plate

material

shall

be 316

stainless

steel.

This

selection

shall

be varied when

process

conditions

require

an

alternative

material.

Brackish

water

may

require

monel;

high-velocity

steam service may

require

specially

selected materials

with

Stellite

overlay.

7.5.3

Flanges

and

Metering

Runs

Orifice

plates

shall be

installed

in

straight

lengths

of

process

pipework

in

accordance

with

ISO

5167. The

half

length

alternatives

given

in

section

1.1

may

be submitted

for

approval

by

the

Company

for

use

w¡th

instruments

used

only

in

feedback

control

or

operator

aid

services.

Any

other

variations

are

subject

to

approval

by

the

Company.

b.

ln

general,

orifice

plates

shall

be

¡nstalled

between

orifice

flanges

rated

at

300

lbs

minimum

and

bored

ro

the

pipe

size

used

in

service

and

in

the

calculatíon.

pipe

connect¡ons shall

be

weld

neck.

Process

tappings shall

be

112-in.

NpT.

Unused

tappings

shall

be

plug

a compatible material,

ged

for

the

c

sure fating

w¡th

a

Sheet

64

of

163

Date

15-9-94

Rev

pecification

Number

01s-JH-1903

Øw,?;:mx,Group

N1

2-0056

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 65/163

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 66/163

max¡mum

flow

rate

specified

Manufacturer,

Alternatively,

a

supplied

subject

to

the

agreement

lf

the

output is used

to

assist

the

local

operation

of a control

valVe

with

handwheel

or

valved

bypass,

a

local

indicator

scaled

in

physical

units shall

be

visible

from

rhe

control

valve,

Process

connections

shall be

112-in. NPT

female.

g.

Electrical

entry

shall

be

MZO

x

1.5

ISO

h. Pneumatic

transmitters shall have

a SO-mm

(2-in.)

gauge

f¡lted showing

the output,

with

a

square

root

scale.

Air

connections

shalf be

114

in.

NPT.

i.

Electronic

transmitters

shall

be

suitable

for

two-wire 4-20

mA,

nominal 24-VDC transmission and be

of

smart

type.

j.

Pneumatic

tränsmitters

shall

be of

the force

balance

type

and

have

an output

between

0.2

and

1.0 barg

(3

to I

psig),

with

a

1.4

barg

(20

psig)

air

supply.

k. Mounting

shall

be

by

means

of

2-in.

pipe

clamp,

or

by di

mount¡ng

from

the

process

manifold.

7.5.5

Turbine

Meters

and PD Meters

The

use of turbine

meters

or

PD

meters

for

any

measurement

shall

be approved

by

the

Company.

b.

Turbine

meters

shall be supplied with

sta¡nless steel

bodies

and

wetted

parts

as

a

minimum.

The

body

rating

shall

be

suitable for

the service

conditions.

The

connection flanges

shall

be

ANSI 3OO

lb minímum.

PD

meter

bodies

may

be of

forged

steel

when

the service

conditions

permit,

and

the

flange rating

may

be

to

line

specification for

low

pressure

duties.

d.

Pulse

outputs

from

transmitting PD

and

turbine

meters

shall

be

integrated

via the

ma¡n

control

room interface

or

DCS

digital

to analogue input

cards,

performance

details

of

which

should be

specified

by

the

Approved Manufacturer.

e.

Where

transmíssion

distances exceed

the

lÍmits

of

the self-

powered

instrument,

head-mounted

pre-amplifiers

shall

be

provided.

f.

Automatic

flow

limiting

devices shall lled

where

process

conditions

could

cause

mete

bove

the

e

t

a

c

h

meter

ay be

Sheet

66 of

163

Date

15-9-94

Rev

pec¡ficataon

Number

01

s-JH-1903

@frff'Jf#i#^GrouP

N12-0056

,t*

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 67/163

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 68/163

b. A

five-valve

manifold shall

be

P

pressu re

transmitters.

e

Filtering

requirements

shall be

supplied,

similar

to

PD

meter

philosophy.

7,5.7

Diaphragm

Seals

The

tappings

for

all

instruments

used

for handling

viscous

or

corrosive

fluids

or

slurries shalt

be

sealed.

Seals

may

be

the

liquid

type

employing

seal

pots or

the

chemical

type

(diaphragm

seall

utilizing

a

diaphragm

with

silicon

oil

(or

other

fluid

between

the

diaphragm

and the

pressure

element

of

the

instrument.

b.

Diaphragm

seals

are

the

preferred

method

for these

applications

withìn

the

temperature limitatìons

for

this

type

of

seal.

The

transmitters

shall

be supplied

with the

capillary

tubes

fitted

and

tested

as

a unit.

The

low

and

high

pressure

transmitter

chambers

shall

be

of

equal

volume

when

these

seals

are

fitted.

The

seals

may

need

to

be

used in

coniunction

with

a flushing

system

in

some

circumstances,

e'9.,

some slurries.

The

flushing

fluid shall

be

compatible

with

the

process

fluid

and

be

supplied

via

â

constant

flow

regulator

and

low-flow

alarm.

d.

Connecting

capillary

tubing

shall be

3

mm

(1/8

in.)

stainless

with

spiral-wound

sta¡nless steel armour'

7.5.8

Other

Flow

Meters

Desígn

and

construction

of other types

of

flow

meters

shall be

to

the

Approved

Manufacturer's

standard,

provided

that

the

materials

and

pressure

design

ís

suitable

for

the

applicable

service

conditions.

Welded

in

equipment

is

subject

to

individual

Company

approval.

7.6

lnstp[at¡on

Notes

7.6.1

Differential

Pressurelnstallations

Piping

isolation

block

valves shall

be supplied

for all

differentia

pressute

¡nstallat¡ons.

Transmitters

may

share

isolation

valves

(e.g.,in

the case

of high

turndown

applications

where

two

transm¡tters

are used)

but

instruments

on shutdown

service

shall

have indivídual

locked

open

block

valves.

a

c

(t

rov

ifferential

@|ffi

?, #JH,G'louP

1

ßev

pecification

Number

01s-JH-l

903

Sheet

68 of

163

Date

15-9-94

N1

2-0056

,t

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 69/163

I

c

Three-valve

process

manifolds

may be

used

on

low-pressure

instalfations.

d.

The

manifold

shall

be

mounted

on

the

instrument support,

the

transmitter

shall

be supported

from

the

manifold'

lnstruments

on

shutdown

service

shall

have

their

manifold

valve handles

removed.

f.

lnstruments

on

toxic,

high-pressure

or

flammable

servíce

shall

have their manifold

vents

and

drains

piped

to

a

closed

header.

o

Process

line tappings

shall

be

f¡tted w¡th

l¡ne

class

isolating

valves of

roddable

type.

lnstruments

shall be

close

couple

whenever

possible.

The

use of

condensate

pots

and

ve

chambers

shall

be

minimised

by

use

of

respective e

of

the

tappings

and

the

instrument,

to

provide

self-drainin

for dry

gases

and

self-vent¡ng/wet

leg

filling for

liquids

and

condensates.

h. Tappings

for

immiscible

fluids shall be

horizontal to

minimise

separation.

Horizontal

metering

runs are

preferred

for

liquid

flow,

and

are

mandatory

for

eccentric

orifices.

Vertical runs may be

used

with

downward

flow

for

steam

and

condensates,

and

upward

flow

for

liquids close

to

their

boiling

(vaporization)

point.

Minimum

straight

metering

lengths upstrearn

and

downstream

of

the

orifice

plate

or

other

primary

element

shall

be

selected

from

the

relevant tables

in ISO 5167'

The

sections

of the

pípe

in

which

the

orifices

are

mounted

shall

be

cylindrical, smooth

and

free from

splatters,

burns

and

scale.

Mill finish

internally is satisfactory

within the

above

conditions. The welded

joint

between

the

pipe and

orifice

flange shall

be sguare,

concentric,

free from undercut and

all

excessive

metal

projection

shall be

removed by

grinding

after

the

flanges are

installed.

k.

For

accurate

determination

of the

operating conditions

at

the

location

of

the

flow

measurement,

a

test

thermowell shall

be

provided,

unless there

is

a temperature

tapping

already

fitted

for

another

purpose.

For

gas

or

steam service,

a

pressure

tapping

shall also

be

f¡tted.

The

tappings

shall

be outside

the

required straight

run.

e

@|ffi

lf# Jx,o**

Date

15-9-94

Rev

pecilication

Number

015-JH-1903

Sheet

69

ol

163

,r*

l2-0056

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 70/163

7.6.2

PD

and Turbine

Merers

a.

lf

servicing

of

the instrument

is required

without

shutting

down

the

line,

block

and

bypass

valves

are required.

These

shall

be

in

accordance

with

the

line

specification

i,e.,

dual

with

bleed

on hazardous

services. lf

the

line

is

to

be

shut

down

for

service,

at

least

one isolating

valve

of

the

block

and

bleed type

shall

be

provided

in

each meter

path.

b.

strainers

shall be

installed

upstream

of

metering

installations.

The

mesh

of

the

strainer

shall

be

selected

to

cause

minimal

pressure

drop and

shall

be

that

recommended

by

the

Approved

meter

Manufacturer.

c

An

índicating

device

(e.9.,

differentiat

pressure

instrum

shall be

installed

across

the

strainers

to

measure

any

increase

in

differential

pressure

caused

by imminent

blockage,

and shall

be

arranged

to activate

a

remote

high

differential

alarm

at

the

DCS.

d.

Turbine

and

PD

meters

shall

be

mounted

in

lines

that

are

always

full

of the

fluid

to

be

measured

Air/vapour

separators

shall

be

provided

where

there

is

a

possíbility

of

entrained

gases

in

the

fluids

routed

tCI the

metering system.

These

devices

shall

be

combined

with

the

filters

where possible,

The

vapours

must

be routed

to a

safe

disposal

system

or

returned

to a

lower

pressure

system.

Small

quant¡ties

can

be

vented

by

manual

meâns,

large

quantit¡es

require

a

fully

automatic

separatíon

system

(outside

the scope

of this

specífication).

7.6.3

VA

Meters

Fluids

which

may

contain

solíds

shall

be

adequately

filtered

upstream

of

the

VA

meters.

b.

VA

meters

shall

be installed

truly vertical

and

be located

wíth

suff¡cient

clearance

to

perrnit

tube

and

float

removal

without

removing

the

meter

body

from

the line.

lf

the

flow

must

not

be

interrupted

during

plant

operations,

line

size

block

and

bypass valves

shall

be

provided.

The

meter

shall

normally

be

f¡tted

in

the

bypass

leg

to avoid

line

stresses

being imposed

on

the

meter,

r

e

a

c

Sheet

70

of

163

Date

15-9-94

Rev

pecif¡cation

Nu¡nber

015-JH-1903

ØfNY,lg:x,*ouP

jl

I

t

I

,T

o

ú

N1 2-O0s6

*

,*

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 71/163

7.7 PerformanceReouirements

7.7.1 Ouality

Control

(QC)

OC

shall be as

detailed

in

the

Contract.

This

section states

the minimum

additional

requÍrements

related

to

flow

instruments

only

and

shall not in

any

way

replace

or

reduce

the

general

OA/OC requirements.

b.

The

lnspection

and Test

Plan

shall

include

the following

checks in

addition

to those

found

necessary

by

the

Approved

Manufacturer

to ensure

the

quality

of

the

product:

A

check

of

all

materials

of

construction

by

c

comparing

the

goods,

the

material

test certificates

the

data sheets

and Drawings.

2. A

check

of

the dimensions

of

the

finished

instruments

against

the

drawings

supplied for

the

Contract

and

approved

by

the

Company.

3.

A

check

of the

completed

instruments

and

all

accessories

against the

data sheet

and specification

requirements.

+.

A

check

on

the

nameplate

data

in

accordance

with

this

specification

and

the

data

sheets and

Drawings.

5.

Full

testing

of

the

instrument

in

accordance

this

specification,

the

Approved

Manufacturer s

additíonal

OA/OC

procedures

and

the approved

Test

and

lnspection

Plan.

6. A check

on the

ínstrument

and

accessories

painting

and

protection

and

general

suitab¡lity

for

the environment.

7.

A

check

on the

tagg¡ng

in

accordance

this

specification

and

the data sheets,

7.7.2

Testing

a.

Forged

items

or

items which

are

formed

by

welding

into

a

pressure

enclosure

shall be

hydrostatically

tested

at

1.s

times

the rating

of the

flanges.

b. Transmitter

instruments

shall

be factory

calibrated

to the

range

noted

on the data

sheets.

a

 l

Sheet

71

of

163

Dats

t 5-9-94

Rsv

pecification Number

015-JH- t903

@ïr0|.,-;y*m,Group

Nl2-0056

,ft

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 72/163

7.7.3 Documentation

All

the

certificatíon

for

each instrument

or

group

of

instruments

shall

be

collated ín

a

Data

Book which

shall be available

at

final

inspection.

The

book

shall

include

as a

minimum:

a.

Completed

Test

and

lnspection

Plan.

b. Material

certificates

and

component

certificates.

c. NDT

certificates.

d.

Weld

procedures

and

qualifications.

e.

Pressure

test certificates.

f.

Calibratíon

certificates.

g.

As-built

Drawings

as

necessary.

7.8

lYemeolagr-Pata

General

information

for

production

of the

nameplate

data

is

given

in

section

4.7 of

this specification,

lnstrument ldentification.

Additionally,

for

orifice

plates,

the following informat¡on

is

required

to be stamped

on

the

proiecting

tag

of the orifice

plate:

On

The

Upstream

Face:

a.

lnstrument tâg

number.

b,

Line

rat¡ng.

c. Plate

material

and thickness.

d.

Plate bore

size

and

pipe

internal

diameter

(lDl,

f. Process

fluid

and

temperature.

8.O

PRESSURE

MEASUREMENT

8.1

ApplicableStandards

BS 1780

Specification

for

Bourdon

Tube

Gauges

8.2

Scope gf

Pressure

Measurement

Sectlgn

This section covers

the

measurement

of

all

p

Pressure

and

Vacuum

riables

in

Sheet

72

of

163

Date

1 5-9-94

Revpeciflcation

Number

01s-JH-1903

ØtifJly,:*m,Group

N1

2-0056

tl,

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 73/163

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 74/163

a

d.

lf

a

transmitter

is on

shutdown

service, the

measurement

shall

be

duplicated

by

a

locally

mounted

direct

reading

pressure gauge,

having

¡Îs

own

process

tapping. Local

output

indicators

are

not

acceptable

for

this

duplicate

measurement.

8.3.3

Alarms

and

Trips

a.

Alarms

lntermediate

alarms and

pre-alarms

shall

be

generated

in

the

DCS from

a

transmitter

signal

that

is

also

used

for

control

and/or indication.

2.

Pressure

gauges

w¡th

a switch

contact

may be used only

for alarms

on

non-hazardous

service such as

HVAC.

The

application

of such

switches

is

subiect

to

approval

by

the

Company.

Where

used,

these switches

shall

be

of

a

type

that

maintaíns

the signal

for

the

whole

range

respectively

above

or below the

set-po¡nt

(not

momentary);

otherwise

the

Contractor shall

provide

latch/delatch

logic.

b,

Trips

For

applications where

the detection

of

high-high

and/or low-

low

pressure

is

used for

general

or

local

shutdown, a

dedicated

process

pressure

switch

is required.

8.3.4

Local Pneumatic

Pressure

Control

Where local

pressure

control

is

specified,

a

pneumatic

pressure

transmitter

shall

be

used,

feeding

into

a

local

receivÍng controller.

b.

For

suitabfe

services approved by the Company,

the

pressure

element

may be

incorporated

as

an

integral

part

of

a

local

controller.

The

design

of

the

instrument

shall be

to

the

Approved

Manufacturer s

standard

practice.

The

local

controller shall be

in accordance

to

sect¡on 12.2.2

of this

specification.

8.3.5

Viscous,

Corrosive

or

Particulate Service

Special methods

for

prevention

of nozzle

blockagè

shall

be

adopted,

such as diaphragm

seals

and/or

flushing systems,

to

ensure

the

integrity

and availability of

instruments

installed

in

adverse

process

conditions.

1

d,

Sheet

74

ol

163

Date

15-9.94

Rev

pecification Number

01s-JH-1

903

@tí01, gn:x,GrouP

N

1

2-0056

fl,

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 75/163

8.4

Sizinq

and Ranging

Reqqirements

8.4.1

The

pressure

applied

to

the

¡nstrument

shall

be corrected

to

allow

for

static

pressure

heads

from

tall

vessels

etc.

8.4.2

lnstruments

for

vacuum

service

shall

have

under-range

protection

of

full

vacuum.

8.4.3

Pressure

Gauges

Pressure

gauges

shall be

ranged

so

that the

normal

pressure

shall be

in

the

middle

third

of

the

span.

b.

For large turndown

requirements,

the

normal

pressure

can be

read

at a rnaximum of

75o/o

of scale

provided

that

the

maximum

pressure

is not

above 9O%

of scale. Addilional

gauges

shafl be

added

as

necessary to

ensure

that the

process

range

is

adequately

covered.

Ranges

shall be

selected

from

the

standard

list in

BS

178O,

Part

2.

d.

The

gauge

shall

be

able

to

withstand. without affect

on the

zero

or calibration

range,

the safety

relief

pressure

of the

system

in

which

it is

¡nstalled.

lf

this

cannot

be

accomplished

within

the

design over-range

of

the instrument

(which

shall not

be

less than

1.4 x

range for

standard

gauges),

other

provisions

such as

over-range

protection

shall

be installed.

8.4.4

Pressure

Transmitters

{Electronic

and

Pneumatic}

<t Where

possible, pressure

transmitters

shall use the same

range

selection

as

pressure gauges.

However, the

range

of

a

transmitter shall

always

be

within

the

range

of the local

gauge

used to monitor

its

output.

b.

The

normal

pressure

shall

not

be

read

at

greater

than

75Yo

of

the

transmitter

calibrated

range for

instruments

reading

steady

pressure.

For

fluctuating

service,

the

normal

pressure

shall be not

more

than

60%

of

the

range.

Suppressed

ranges

can

be used

for

control

loops

or

large ranged indications

to

improve accuracy

and

clarity

of the

readout.

c

The

calibrated

range

of

the

transmitter

shall

preferably

utilize

between

600/

and 80%

of

the capsule

span.

Under

no

circumstances

shall

the

unit

be

calibrated

outside

the

Approved

Manu

turndown

rating,

facturer's

recommend

for

span and

a

c

Sheet

75 of

163

Date

1

5-9-94

Rev

pecification

Number

015-JH-1903

@tíïly,y*rm,Group

tu

12-0056

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 76/163

8.4.5 Pressure

Switches

The

pressure

switch

span

shãll

be

selected

to

cover the

requirements

of

:

1.

The

required range

2,

The

switch

reset

hysteresis

3.

Be

within

the

range

of the monitoring

pressure

gauge.

b.

The

proof

pressure

shall

be

within

the

system relief

pressure,

"Gauge

minders"

are

not

permitted

on

shutdown

instruments.

Particular

attention

shall

be

paid

to

ensure

that

the

switch

reset

can occur

without

completely

venting

lines,

stopping

pumps

etc.

8.5

Design

and

Gonstructio

lnstruments

measuring

absolute

pressure

shall

have

compensation

for

barometric

pressure

changes.

8.5.X

Pressure

Gauges

a.

Casing

and

Dial

Gauges

of

150-mm

(6-in.)

diameter

shall

be

standard.

1OO-mm

(4-in,)

gauges

shall

only

be

used

for

panel-

mounted

applications

where

a

number

of

gauges

are

installed

together.

Draught

gauges

of

strip

type

shall be

mounted

on a

local

panel

with illumination

or may

employ

a

quadrant

edgewise

illuminator.

2.

The

connection

shall be

at

the

bottom

and

shall

be

l

/2-

in.

NPT

male

for

process gauges

and 1/4-in. NpT

male

for

receiver

gauges.

Diaphragm

sealed

gauges

shall

use

the

Approved

Manufacturer's

standard

connection

(normally

f

-in.

flange

to

line

pipe

rating).

3.

Gauges

shall

be

rnoisture

and

dust

resistant

with

no

change

of

atmosphere.

4.

Dials

shall

be

white

with

black

numerals.

5.

Gauges

shall

be fitted

with

shatre

lass

c

1

Shest

76

of 163

Date

1

5-9-94

Rev

pecification

Number

01s-JH-1903

@rtfrr,3# H,Group

N

1 2-0056

rl/

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 77/163

6.

The

casing shall be of

Phenolic

material

or 316

stainless

steel.

7. Circular

gauges

below

25

barg

(363

psig)

scaling

shall

have

a

safety

blow-out

disc

in

the

back.

Gauges

for

higher

pressures

shall

have

a

solid

front

and

blow-out

rear.

Gauges

for

services

above

4O

barg

(58O

psig)

shall

be

the

full

safety

pattern

type.

8.

The

gauge

shall

be

filled

w¡th

glycerine

as

standard,

gauges

in

vibration

or

pulsation

duty

shall be

fitted

with

gauge

snubbers

{pulsatíon

dampers}

to

the

same

material

specification

as

the

element.

9.

The dial

shall be marked

as

follows:

(a)

Unit title.

(b)

Manufacturers full name

(c)

Manufacturers

full

model

number,

(d)

Element

material

spec.

and

grade

(e)

Other

key

details,

e.g.,

To

NACE

MRO1O75

etc.

b.

Measuring

Element and Movement

For

general

use,

the

gauge

shall use

a bourdon

tube

measuring

element.

The accuracy

shall

be

1o/

or

better.

The

movement

shall

be

either

rotary

geared

stainless

stee¡

or cam and

roller

type.

There shall be

an

external

zeroing

device.

2. Slack

diaphragm

elements

can be

used

for

low

pressure

applications

(less

than

0.8

barg,

i.e., 12

psig).

3.

Bellows

or

diaphragm

elements

shall

be

used

for

differential

pressure

gauges.

4.

Dual

element

gauges

shafl

only

be

used

when

the

differential

pressure

exceeds

1Qo/o at

the

avaílable

static

pressure.

5. The

element rnaterial for

process

gauges

shall

be 316

staínless

steel

as

a

standard,

and

to

a

superior

specífication

when

the

service

demands.

1

@lr0l,?;:;:X,Gr'up

Shêet

77

of

163

Rev

pecification

Number

015-JH-1903

Date

15-9-94

Nl 2-0056

r/

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 78/163

¿¿^

Lt

12

*

ô

o

ú

.r

6.

Receiver

gauges

shall

have

bronze

extra-wide

bourdon

tubes

with

brass

socket

and

tip.

8,5.2

ËlectronicTransmitters

Electronic

transmitters

shall

be of

the

strain

gauge,

piezo-

resistive

or capacitance type.

Other

elements

may

be

used

provided

that

accuracy,

stabilíty and

reliability

criteria

meet

operational

requirements.

a

b.

For

low-pressure

ranges, minus

1

barg

to

plus

2

barg

(mínus

15 to +30

psigl,

differential

pressure

Ínstruments shall be

used

for

gauge

pressure

service,

with

the

low-pressure

connection open

to

the

atmosphere

or

connected

to

a

reference zero.

Electronic

transmitters

shall be

of

the

two-wire

type,

operating

at

a

nom¡nal

24 VDC.

They

shall be certified

for

the

hazardous

area

in

accordance

with

the

execution code

noted

in

the

Engineering

Group

Specification

entitled

  tnstrument

Engineering

Basic

Data

(Number

Ol s-JH-1

901

).

d.

Electronic

transmitters

of

the

smart

type

shall

be

used.

e.

Transm¡tters

shall

have

a

minimum

1OO

barg

(1450

psig)

rated

stainless

steel body.

All

wetted

parts shall

be

316

stainless

steel

as

a minimum,

with

the

specification

increased as

necessary

for

the

service.

t.

Transmitters

shall be

capable

of

withstanding

over

range

pressure

on

either side

of

the capsule

at least

equal

to

the

body

rating.

g.

Connections

shall be

112-in.

NPT

female

h. Electr¡cal

entry shall

be M2O x

1.5

lSO.

i.

Mounting

shall

be

by

bolting

to

the

mounted

rnanifold

wherever

possible,

and shall

be from the

manifold in

cases

where the

vent

and drains are

piped

or a

protection

box is

supplied.

8.5.3

Pressure

and

Differential

Pressure

Switches

Pressure

switches shall

be of a

design

where

the

sens¡ng

element

is

remote

from

the switch

housing.

The movement

of

the

element shall

be

translated

into

a

snap action

on the

switch,

with

a

fixed or

adiustable dìfferential.

c

a

Speclfication

Number

015-JH-1903

Ølr0l'gJ#1JJx,GrouP

Sheet

78

of

163

Dâtê

15-9-94

Rev

rl,

1

2-0056

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 79/163

b.

switches

shall

be hermetically

sealed

single-pole

double

throw

(SPDT).

The

switch

contacts shalt

be

selected

according

to'the

service

conditions

and

certifícatíon

stated in

the Contract

requirements.

Generally,

this shall

be:

For

Ëx'd'

apparatus

connected

directly

to

a

pLC

or relay

system,

contacts

shall be

minimum

1

amp rated

for

110

VAC.

2.

For lS

systems

using simple

apparatus,.,

contacts

shall

be

gold

plated

and

suitable for

low

signal

levels.

The

set-point

shall

be

adjustable

over

the

whole

range,

withan

internally calibrated

scale.

d.

The

process

wetted parts

of

the

system

shall

be

of

316

stainless

steel

material

as a minimum,

wíth

the

specification

increased

in

accordance

with

the

process

requirements.

e

To

avoid

the

need

to

provide

barrier

glands

for

el

entries,

pressure

switches

shall be

of

a type which

p

positive

protection

against

process

fluids

entering

electrical

housing

in

the

event

of

element

failure,

i.e.,

means

of

a

solid

barrier

and a

vent.

t.

Process

connect¡on

shall

be

112-in.

NpT

female

g.

Electrical

connection

shall

be

M20

x l.b

lSO.

h.

Mounting

arrangements

shall

be

the

Approved

Manufacturer's

standa rd.

8.5.4 Pneumatic

PressureTransmitters

Pneumatic

transmitters

shall

nozzle

and

flapper

type,

1

c

a

be

of

the

motíon-balanced

b.

The

output

will

be

from

0.2

ro

1 0

barg

(3

to 1E

psig),

with

a

1.4

barg

(20

psig)

supply

air

pressure.

c.

An

output

signal

gauge

shall

be supplied.

d. Process

connect¡on

size

shall

be

112-in.

Npr

female.

signal

and

air

supply

connectíons

shall

be l/4-in.

NpT

female.

e.

Mounting

will

be

by

2-in.

pipe

clamp.

Sheet

79

of 163

Date

15-9-94

t

Rev

pecification

Number

01s-JH-1903

@fïf,7,z::;:x^Gr'uP

N1 2-0056

ù

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 80/163

8.5.5

Diaphragm

Seals

All instruments

used

for handling

viscous

or

corrosive

fluids

shall

be

sealed.

Seals

may be

the

liquid

type employing

seal

pots

or

the

chemical

sealed

type

(diaphragm

seal)

utilizing

a

diaphragm

and

a

silicon

oil

(or

other

suitable

fluid) filling

to

transmit

the

pressure

signal.

b.

Diaphragm

seals

are

the

preferred

method within

the

constraints

of temperature

limitation

for the

filling

fluid. The

instruments

shall

be

purchased

with the seals and

capillary

tubes

fitted

and

tested

as a

un¡t.

For

instruments used

on

differential

pressure

service,

the

low-and

high-pressure

chambers

shall

be

of

equal

volume

when

chemical

seals

are

fitted.

d. Capillary

tubing shall

be stainless

steel 3-mm

(1/8-in.)

lD

protected

by spiral-wound stainless

steel armour

sheathing.

8.5.6

Flushing Systems

Flushing

can

be

constant by

use

of a constant flow

regulator

and

low-flow

alarm,

or

intermittent by

manual

pump.

Valve

connections

shall be

provided

on

a

spool between

the line

class valve and

the

seal

where flushing

is

to

be performed.

b,

The

flushing

liquid

shall be

compatible

with

the

process

fluid.

8.5.7

High-TemperatureService

Process

instruments

connected

to high-temperature systems

shall

be installed

with

provision

to maintain

the

Ínstrument

temperature

below

70

C

(158oF)

during

normal

duty,

ventÎng

and bleeding

etc.

A

condensate

seal,

scroll, extended

capillary

or

proprietary

cooling

extension

shall

be

fitted.

8.5.8

Low-TemperatureService

Pressure

instruments

connected to crude oil,

wet

gas

or

water

service

in

sub-zero

conditions

shall

have

winterisation

provisions.

8.5.9

Pulsating

Service

lnstruments

connected

to

equipment and

services

in

pulsating

service shall

be

protected

by

pressure

snubbers

of

an

approved

adjustable

type.

The material

for

the

snubbers

shall be

the same as that selected

for

the

in ument wetted

parts.

a

c

tt

a

@KÏlYnx,GrouP

Sheet

8O

of

163

Date

15-9-94

Rev

pecification Number

015-JH-1903

rl

12-0O56

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 81/163

b.

The

use of

partially

closed

valves

is

not

permitted

8.5.1O

Range Protection

Pressure

instruments

shall

generally

be

pressure

rated

up to

the

setting

of the

system

relief valve,

or

other

maximum

pressure

that can

arise under

fault

conditions. Where

this

would

prevent

the

instrument

being suitably

ranged

for íts

process

function,

the correct

range

shall

be

selected

and

over-range

protection

shall

be

provided,

b. Over-range

protection

is not

permitted

on emergency

shutdown

pressure

switches.

The

protectors,

or

gauge

minders, shall

be adjustable

{w¡th

lock-nut)

and shall

be

of a

mater¡al

equal

to that

selected

for

the

instrument

wetted

parts.

8.6

lnstallation

Notes

8.6.1

A

piping

block

valve

may

be shared

by a

transmitter

and

loca

gauge,

but

a

shutdown

instrument

shall have

an

individua

locked

open

line

class block

valve.

8.6.2

Where

an instrument ¡s mounted

at a d¡stance

exceeding

2.5

m

(8

ft,)

from

the

primary

block

valve,

an

additional block valve

shall be

installed

adiacent to the

instrument.

The block valve

and

connecting

piping

shall be line

class.

8.6.3

Each

direct

pressure

instrument

shall

have an individual

two-

valve

manifold.

A

five-valve

manifold

shall be

used

for

DP

application.

Low-pressure

DP

may

use a three-valve

manifold.

Shutdown manifolds

shall be labelled as

such and

valve

handles

removed.

8.6.4 Manifold

vents

and

drains

shall

be

piped

to

a

safe

place

or

disposal

system except

for

instruments

in

non-hazardous service

such as

low-pressure

non-toxic

and

non-flammable fluids,

8.6.5

Pressure instruments

shall be installed

in

orientations in

accordance

with

the

Approved

Manufacturer's instruct¡ons

and

shall

not

be

mounted

directly on machinery.

8.6.6

Gauges up to

150-mm

(6-in.)

diameter

may

be supported

direct

from the

process pipe

work

in

suitable cases.

8.6.7

Pulsation

and

gauge

minders

when

required

shall be mounted

as

close to

the

instrument

as

possible.

a

c

Sheet

81

of 163

Date

15-9-94

|

Rev

pecif¡cation

Number

01s-JH-1903

@tffil,T,wx,n**

rr,

N12-0056

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 82/163

I.

8.6.8

Pressure

instruments

on

LPG

or

high-pressure

steam

service

shall

be

fitted

with

a

restr¡ct¡on

orifice

of

1.44-mm

t1116-in.)

diameter

downstream

of

the

piping

class

block

valve

to

prevent

excess

flow

in

the

event

of

a

fracture of the

measuring

element.

8.6.9

The

transmitter

air

signal output

piping

from

pneumatic

transmittars

shall

incorporate

a tee

with

valve and

plug

for

connection

of

a

calibration

gauge

8.7

Performance

Requi.reme-nlg

8.7.1

Ouality

Control

(QC)

OC shall

be

as detailed

in the

Contract.

This

section

states

the minimum

additional

requirements

related to

pressure

instruments only and

shall

not

in

any

way

replace

or

reduce

the

general

OA/OC

requirements,

b,

The

test

and

inspection

plan

shall

include

the

following

items

in

addition to those

found

necessary

by

the

Approved

Manufacturer

to

ensure

the

quality

of the

product:

1. A

check

of

the

instrument and

all

accessories

i

accordance

with

this

specification

and

the

data

she

and

Drawings.

2. Full

works

calibration

and

issue

of test

and

calibration

cert¡f

icate.

3.

A check

on the

nameplate

data

in

accordance

with

this

specification and

the

data

sheets

and

Drawings.

4,

A check

on the

painting

and

protection

and

general

su¡tabil¡ty

for

the

environment.

5.

A check

on

the tagging

in

accordance

with

this

specification

and the

data

sheets.

8.7.2

Documentation

The

following

data shall

be

available

at

final

inspection:

a.

Completed

test

and

inspection

plan.

b.

Material certif¡cates

and

NACE

certificates where

required

by

the

Contract.

c.

Instrument

test

and

calibration

certificate,

d.

Hazardous area

certificates

a

Specification

Number

01s-JH-1903

@|ffi ,J1,\ffiH^G louP

Sheet

82 of

163

DatB

15-9-94

Rev

 if: .1

rft

 

r

2-0056

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 83/163

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 84/163

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 85/163

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 86/163

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 87/163

9.5.2

b.

capillaries

shall

be stainless

steel

armoured

and

PVC

covered.

c.

Bi-metallic

dial

thermometers

shall

be

hermetically

sealed,

every

angle,

9.5-mm

(3/8-in.l

stem,

with

external

pointer

adjustment.

d.

The

connection

of

the

head

to the

well shall

be

by

112-in.

NPT

adiustable

union.

Resistance

Temperature

Detectors

(RTDs)

a.

RTD

elements

shall

comply

with

BS

1904 and shall

be

Platinum

type

PT

100,

i.ê.,

1OO

ohms

@

0'C,

and

Fundamental

lnterval

(Fl)

of

38.5

ohms.

They shall

be

of

the

grade

of

accuracy

appropriate

to the

application.

b.

RTDs

shall

be

connected

to

measuring

instruments

by

either

a

three-

or

four-wire

system.

Three

wire

systems

are

preferred

for

normal

process

measurement

applications'

c

All

applícations

shall

use

duplex

element

RTDs

even

if

o

one

signal

is

required.

9,5.3

ThermocouPles

a.

Thermocouples

shall

comply

with

BS

4937.

b.

Thermocouples

shall

be

mineral

insuJated

spring-loaded

type,

sheathed

to

6-mm

(1/4-in.)

diameter

w¡th

the

hot

junction

insulated

from or

bonded

to

the

sheath.

Larger

diarneter

sheaths

may be

used

for

special

applications'

Thermocouple

sheaths

shall

be

constructed

from

seamless

tube

material

of

minimum

1-mm

(3/64-in.)

wall

thickness

selected

to

suit temperatures

and

specific

cond¡tions.

(see

section

9.4 for

details.)

d.

The

minimum

sheathing

material

grade

is

316

stainless

steel.

lncolloy

shall

be

used

for

all

services

above

1000' C

(1

832'F)

e.

Thermocouples

for

use

above

1200"

C

12192"F)

may

be

constructed

from

bare

wire

with

ceramic

insulators

for

applications

where

the

efement

may

be

prone

to binding

in

the

well.

t.

All

applications

shall

use

duplex

thermocouple

elements,

even

if

only one signal

is

required.

c

@|ffiiJ1, JHH:**

1

Bev

pecìfication

Number

01

5-JH-1903

Date

1

5-9-94

Sheet

87 of

163

12-OO56

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 88/163

a:,

g

Thermocouple

head

terminals

shall

be

marked

with

positive

and

negative symbols.

when the

thermocouple

has

wired

terminations,

these

should

preferably

be colour

coded

to BS

1843.

Afternatively,

they

shall

be

sleeved

and

identified

as

positive

and

negative.

h.

On

cryogenic

process

pipework,

pad-type

thermocouples

shall

be

used

wherever

possible.

Thermowells

shall

only

be

used

where

absolutely

necessary

for

accuracy

or sensitivity.

i. skin

thermocouples

shall

be

specified

in

certain

special

applications,

ê.g.,

furnace

tube

skin

temperature

measurement;

the

hot

junction

shall

be

permanently

secured

to

the

tube

or

pipe.

The

protection tube

or

pad shall

be

shaped

to

match,

and

welded

to

the

furnace

tube

or

pipe.

External

insulation

shall

be

fitted

over

the

protection

tube

where

it

is

exposed

to the

burner

flame.

j.

care

shall

be

taken in

the

selection

of

the

protection

tube

material

and

pad

to

ensure

the

correct

metallurgy

of

the

weld

to

the

parent

pipe.

9.5.4

Terminal

Head

a

Thermocou

p

les

a

nd

RT

Ds

sh

a

ft

be

of

th

e d

U

p

lex

ty

pe

two

e

le

ments

mo

un

ted

n

the

sa

me

t

h

e mo

WE

or

s

heath

with

all connections

taken

to a head-mounted

termÍnal

block.

The

elements

shall

be connected

down

to an

intermediate

junction

box

mounted

adjacent

to

the

transmitter

and

containing

sufficient

terminals

to connect

both

elements,

For

thermocouples,

the cable

shall

be

the

correct-extension

type

and

the

terminals

shall

be manufactured

from

the

correct-

extension

material.

b.

one

element

shall

be

connected

from

the intermediate

junction

box

to

the

field

mounted

transmitter/converter.

For

thermocouples,

the

correct

extension cable

shall be

used.

The

second

elernent

shall

terrninate

at

the

intermediate

junction

box

terminals,

enabling

the

element

to

be changed

over

at the

junctíon

box in

case

of

failure

of

the first

element.

c

Head-mounted

terminal

enclosures

and

the

intermediate

box

shall

be

weatherproof

to lp65

as

a

minÍmum

and

certífied

for

the electrical

area

classificatíon.

d.

When

two

or

more

thermocouples

or

res

detectors

are

located

in

the

same

thermowell,

th

dividually

and

permanently

identified

re

,

ê 9.,

Sheet

88

of

l

63

Date

15-9-94

Rev

peciflcatíon

Number

01s-JH-1903

@l0B,:xx,GrouP

Nr

2-0056

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 89/163

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 90/163

e.

Electrical

entry

shall

be 20

mm

(3/4

in.)

1.5

lSO.

9.5.7

Therrnowells

a

Thermowells

shall

be

specified

for all

temperature

detecring

elements,

with

the

exception

of

detectors on

skin

point

and

cryogenic

service,

and

shall

enable the element

to

be

removed

during

plant

operations.

b.

40-mm

(1.5-in,)

flanged

thermowells

shall

be

used

for

all

normal

duties

on

pipework

and

50 mm

(2

in.)

for

vessels,

unless

otherwise

stated.

Thermowells

shall

be

solid

drilfed

and tapered,

the

flange

shall

be

attached by

fiilet

welding for

3OO

lbs rated flanges and full-penetration welding

for

higher

ratings.

Flange

ratings

shatl

be

300

lbs.

minimum

or

a

higher

rating

to suit

the relevant

vessel or

piping

specification.

The

flange-

face

type

and

finish

shall

be

in

accordance with

the

relevant

piping

specification.

d.

Thermowell material

shall

be

316

stainless

steel minimum

alternative

materials

to

suit

process

cond¡tions.

Screwed

thermowells,

size 314-in, NPT,

shall

only

be

used

on cooling

water or

atmospheric vessel

apptications.

The

lD of

thermowells

for

duplex thermocouples

and

resistance

thermometers

shall

be

to suit 6 mm

(1/4

in.l

elements.

Larger

diameter elements may

be

used

for

special

applications.

g.

The

surface

of

the

well

shall be

smooth and

free from

burrs

and

notches, The

transition

at

diameter

changes

and

connection

to

the

flange

shall

be

a smooth

radius

to

minimise

stress amplification.

h.

Where

thermowells are installed

in

gas

or

vapour

lines

or in

lines

subjected

to

high-liquid

velocities,

combined

stress

and

vibration

calculations

shall

be

carried

out

to

a

proven

method.

i.

All

thermowells

shall

be

manufactured

of certified

rnaterials

and

shall

be

pressure

tested.

Welding

shall

be

conducted

in

accordance

with

ASME

lX.

j.

Proprietary

thermowells

supplied

with instru nts

shall

meet

the

requirements

of

this

specification.

c

e

t

Sheet

90

of

163

Dats

15-9-94

Rev

pecification

Numbef

0r 5-JH-1903

@|ffill, #H,Group

d,

Nl2-OO56

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 91/163

9.6

lnstallAtion

Notes

9'6.1

Thermowells

shall not

be installed

in

line

sizes less

than 1O0

mm

(+

in).

In

smaller

lines

where

temperature

measurement

is

required,

the

line

shall

be

swaged

up to

1OO

mm

(4

in)

or,

for

3_

in.

lines

and

above,

the thermowell

shall

be

mounted

in

an

elbow.

9,6.2 Temperature

instruments,

i.e.,

dial

thermometers,

transmitters

etc shall

be

installed

such

that

they

are readable

and

accessible

from

ladders

and

platforms.

9.6.3

All wells

shall

be

installed

in

positions

such

that

the etement

and

head

can

be

withdrawn

without

removing

other

equipment.

9.7

Performance

Resuirements

9.7.1

Quality

Control

(OC)

QC

shatl

be

as

detailed

in the

contract.

This

sectíon

srates

the

minimum

additional requirements

related

to

temperature

instruments

only

and

shall not

in

any way replace

or

reduce

the

general

OA/OC

requirements.

b.

The

ínspection

and

test

plan

shall

include

the

following

checks

in

addition

to

those

found

necessary

by

the

Approveå

Manufacturer

to

ensure

the

quality

of

the

product:

1. A

check

of

all materials

of

construction

by

cross-

comparing

the

goods,

the mater¡al

test

certifÍcates

and

the data

sheets

and

Drawings.

2.

A

check

of

the dimensions

of

the

finished

instruments

against

the

Drawings

supplied

for

the

Contract

and

approved

by

the

Company.

3.

A

check

of

the completed

instruments

and

all

accessoríes

against

the

data

sheet and

specification

requirements.

4, A

check

on

the nameplate

data

in

accordance

with

thís

specification

and

the

data

sheets

and

Drawíngs.

5.

Full

testing

of

the instrument

in

accordance

this

specification,

Approved

Manufacturer,s

additionaf

OA/OC

procedures

and

the approved

test

and

inspection

plan.

6.

A check

on

the

instrument

and

acc

ng

and

protection

and general

suitability

t

a

Sheot

91

of

163

Date

15-9-94

Fev

peclfication Number

015-JH-1903

@fffYsw,Group

$

N

I 2-0056

,r

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 92/163

A

check

on

the

taggíng

in

accordance

th¡s

specification

and

the data

sheets.

9.7.2

Testing

Forged

items

or items

which

are

formed

by

welding

into

a

pressure

enclosure

shall

be

hydrostatically

tested

at 1.5

tÍmes the

rating

of

the flanges,

or

1.5

times the

line rating,

whichever

is

higher.

b. Transrnitter instruments

shall

be

factory

calibrated

to

the

rânge

noted

on the data

sheets.

9.7.3

Documentation

All

the

certification for

each

instrument

or

group

of

instruments

shall

þe collated

in

a Data

Book

which

shall be available

at

finat

inspection.

The

book

shall

include

as a

minimum:

Completed

Test

and

lnspection

Plan.

b.

Material cert¡ficates

and component

certificates

thermowells.

c.

NDT

certificates

(minimum

dye

penetrant

test

of

all

weldsl.

d.

Weld

procedures

and

qualifications.

e. Pressure

test

certificates.

f

. Calibration

certifícates.

9.8

Nameplate

Da_tA.

General

information

for

production

of

the nameplate

data

is

given

in

sect¡on

4.7

of

this specification,

lnstrument

ldentification,

Additionally,

for

thermowells,

the

following information

ís

required

to

be

stamped

on

the

f¡ange

rim or

lagging

extension

a.

lnstrument

tag

number.

b

Temperature

Range.

c, Flange

rat¡ng

and

size.

d.

Test

pressure.

e.

Material

.

7

a

Sheet

92

of

163

Dato

1s-9-94

l

Rev

pecification

Number

015-JH-1903

@tí01iJ1oY#m,.*

N I

2-0056

r4,

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 93/163

f

Bore

{element}

size

1O.O

LEVEL

MEASUREMENT

1O.1

Aoplicable

Standards

BS 3463

Specification

for

Observation

and

Gauge

Glasses

for

Pressure

Vessels

10.2

Scope

of

Level

Measurement

Section

This section

details the

measurement

of

all

process

level

variables

on

the

plant.

for

the

purposes

of

local

indication

or

remote

signalling

or

transmission.

10.3

Level

lnstrument Tvne

and

S,glection

1O.3.1

General

a.

Level

instruments

shall

be selected

to

provide

the

re

accuracy

and

integrity

with

the

emphasis

on simplici

¡nstallation and maintenance.

b.

Level

instruments

shall

be

placed

in

chambers

external

to

the

vessel and

not

mounted internally

except

with

the

approval

of the

Company.

c. Level

instruments

shall

be

mounted

on

sland

pipes

(bridles)

to

avoid

excessive

numbers

of

individual

vessel nozzles,

provided

that:

Construction

requirements

of the

piping/vessel

fabrication

code

can

be

met

without

compromising

the

required

ranges.

2.

Access

for

operational readings

and

maintenance

is

not

impaired.

3.

Walkway

clear space

is not

impeded.

d,

Where

a

safety trip

function

is

required,

a

separate

instrument

shall be supplied.

Shutdown

instruments shall

not

share

connect¡ons

or

standpipes

with

control

instruments.

e.

lf

level instrument

requirements

are

included

in the

fabrication

code

for

the

vessel,

these

shall be

followed

1

during the

instruments

se

lecti

o

n

and

the

of

level

1

Rev

pecificatlon

Number

0

1

5-JH-1

903

Øï0lYn::x,G louP

Sheet

93

ol

163

Date

15-9-94

N

1 2-0056

,dt

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 94/163

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 95/163

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 96/163

h.

other

types

of

measurement,

e,g.,

capacitance

or

ultrasoníc

may be offered

to

the

Company

for

approval.

The

use of

radioactive

instruments

shall

only

be

considered

after

consultation

with

the Company.

10.3.4

lnterface

Service

The

upper

connection

of

all

interface

installations

shall

always

be submerged

in

the

less

dense

liquid.

Additional

connections

to

the

vessel

may

be installed

as

necessary

to

drain

back

separated

fluids.

The

additional

connections

shall

be

of

an

equal

size

and

standard

as

the

main

connections.

All

proposed

systems

for

interface

measurement are subject

to

Company approval.

Gauging

shall

be

by

through-vision

gauge

glasses

where

practical.

Float-type

instrurnents

with

magnetic

followers

may

be

used

for

suitable

services.

lnterface

transmitters

shall

normally

be

of

displacer

type.

Where

the

specific

gravity

difference

is

0.1

or less,

capacitance-type

instruments

shall

be

considered,

10.3,5

Alarms

and Trips

a.

Alarms

lntermediate

alarms

and

pre-alarms

shall

be

generated

in

the

DCS

from

a

transmitter

signal

that is

also

used

for

control

and/or

indication.

The

use

of

magnetic

swítches

mounted

outside

float-type

level

gauges

to

generate

alarms

shall

only

be

used

on

non-hazardous

service

and

wíth

Company

approval.

b.

Trips

For

applications where

the

detection

of

high-high

and/or low-

low

level

is

used

for

general

or

local

shutdown,

dedícated

¡nstruments

shall be

used

and

they

shall

be

direct-mounted

process

switches.

Float-type

switches

shall

normally

be

used.

Displacer

operated

switches

shall

only

be

used

where

the

exact

switching

point

cannot

be

determined

at

the

design

stage.

a

b

c

c

lf

for

mechanical

reasons

level

switches

have

to

be

be

on

vessels

which

ca

during

plant

operat¡on.

and

if

agreed

to by

the

company,

internally

installe

hall

only

rised

 

be

emptied

Sheet

96 ol

163

Date

15-9-94

Rev

pecification

Number

01s-JH-1903

ØÏ01, tnYx,GrouP

N12-0056

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 97/163

d. Where

appreciable

changes

in liquid

density

occur

across

the

plant

operating

range,

including

startup

conditions,

calculations

shall

be

performed,

for Company

approval,

to

confirm

that

the

measurement

system

chosen for

the

application is

not

rendered

unsafe

at any

condition.

Corrections

shall

only

be

rnade

to

transmitted

signals

used

for shutdown

purposes

when

it

can

be

shown

that

failure

of

the

correction

signal

in

either

direction

cannot

reduce

the

shutdown

integríty.

10.3.6 Tank

Metering

Where accurate

assessment

of

tank

contents

on

a mass

basis

are

required

to be

measured,

the equipment

¡s

covered

in

section

1 1.0

of this

specification.

1O.3.7

Local

Level Control

a

Where

local

level

control is

specified,

a

pneumat

transmitter

(displacer

or

differentíal

pressure

as

appropriate)

shall

be

used,

feeding

into

a receiver

controller.

b. combined

transmitter/controller

systems

may

be

offered

for

Company approval

when the

service

conditions

are suitable.

The

local

controller

shall

be

in

accordance

with

section

12.2.4

of this

specification.

10.4

Sizing

and

Ranging

R.eguirements

1O.4.1

Range

Criteria

The

calculation

of

level

instrument

range

depends

on

the

physical

dimensions

of

the

installation.

The

operating

levels

in

the

vessels

can

depend

on

complex

process

calculations,

part¡cularly

when

exposed

surface areas

are

important,

or

when

dip

tubes,

overflow

separation

or

similar vessel

internals

are fitted.

The

selection

of

ranges

should

be

determined

in

association

with

the

Contractor s

process

engineers

to

achieve

the

required

monitoring

and

control

while

retaining

a

practical

and economic

installation.

b.

The

design

of

the

system

shall

take

¡nto

account

the

avoidance

wherever

possibfe

of

trapped

fluids

when

an

instrument

is

isolated

and

drained-

This

problem

is

more

common

on

small

vessels.

changes

of

the

preferred

nozzle

locations

are

acceptable

when

there

are

ts to the

self-drainage

or

valve

drainage

systems

e

c

a

Sheet

97

of

163

Date

1

5-9-94

Rev

pecification

Number

015-JH-1903

@tí01 ;t:x:x,Gmup

N I 2.0056

rf

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 98/163

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 99/163

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 100/163

c

The

instrument

connections

and

positions

are as

follows:

1/2

in,-NPT

(5-valve

manifold)

mnfr. std,

P

TX

1 in.-3OO

lb min

ide-bottom

evel

Switch

2 in.-300

lb

rnin

ide bottom

isplacement

Tx

1 in.-300

lb

min,

ide-side

agnetic

Gauge

1

in.-3OO

lb min.

ide-side

auge

Glass

INST.

CONNECTION

ONN.

POSN.

NST.

TYPE

d.

Special

connectîons

and other

sizes

and types

shall

be

subject

to

approval

bY ComPanY.

e.

All

instruments

shall

be

fitted

with

full

bore

roddable

1/2

in.

drain

and

vent

valves. These

shall

be

plugged

for

standard

services

and

piped

to

a

safe

location

for

hazardous

services.

Piped

system

disposal

arrangements

shall

include a

safe

visual

rneans of checking

that

effluent

flow

has stopped,

e.g.,

tun

dish

or sight

flow

tube.

10.5.2

Stand

Pipes

(Vessel

Bridles)

Where

stand

pipes

are

used

they

shall be constructed

using

the

same

fittings,

materials,

codes,

production

techniques

and

inspection

procedures

as

the

vessel trim.

They shall

be

4-in.

NB

but

may

be

2 in.

or

3 in,

with Company

approval

They

shall

be

connected

to

the

vessel

by

isolating

valves to

line specification

(minimum

300

lb

rated)

and be

adequately

supported.

Each

¡nstrument

shall

be

individually

served

by

full-bore

type

roddable

isolating

valves

of

f

-in.

NB 30O

lb

minimum

rating

(2-in.

NB

for

displacement

transmitters).

The

stand

pipe

isolating

valves shall

be capable

of being

locked

in

the

open

position.

b.

All

stand

pipes

shall

be

fitted

with

full

bore roddable

3/4-in

drain

valves

and

f

-in,

vent valves.

These

shall

be

plugged

for

standard

services

and

piped

to

a

safe

location

for

hazardous

services.

Piped

system

disposal

arrangements shall

include a

safe

visual

means of checking

that

effluent

flow

has

stopped, e.9,,

tun

dish

or

sight flow tube.

c.

The stand

p¡pe

shall

be

insulated

to

at

least

the

same

standard

as

the

vessel.

Since

the

temperature of

the

fluid

in

the

stand

pipe

witl

vary from

the

bulk

fluid

temperature,

calculations

shall

be

performed

to ensu

a

@tí|f,rmx,GrouP

1

Rev

pecification

Number

015-JH-1903

Sheet

100 of

163

Date

15-9-94

N12-0056

(f

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 101/163

liquids

shall

be

compensated

w

supplied

wíth

the

¡nstruments.

Mechanical

integrity is

not affected

by

differential

expansion

between

the

nozzle centres.

The weight

of

the stand

pipe

and all the

attached

instruments

shall

also

be

taken

into

account.

2. Fluid density

changes

do

not

cause

meâsurement

errors

outside

acceptable

lirnits

for

the

application.

10.5.3

Materials and

Fabrication

a.

All

instrument

wetted

pressure

parts

shall

be

constructed

using

materials equal

to the

vessel

design

specifications,

with welding, heat treatment,

NDT, certification

and hydro-

testing

all conducted

to

the

same

standard

as

the

vessel.

b.

NACE,

impact test¡ng

and

any

other

special

Project or

service

requirements shall

be

noted

on

the

data sheets and

shall

be supplied.

c

Operating

parts

of the

instruments

shall be constructed

of

materials

suitable for the

service

with a

minimum

requirement

of

316 stainless steel.

d.

lf the

float

of

float-type

instruments

cannot

be

pressure

tested

at

the

vessel

test

pressure,

this

shall

be

clearly

labelled on the

outside

of

the

instrument,

Where the

measured

liquid

contains

particles

or

material

which

would

accumulate

in

the chamber

or

connecting

piping,

the

nozzle(s)

shall

be

purged

with

a compatible fluid,

The fluid shall be monitored

by

a

constant

flow

regulator and

alarm.

1O.5.4

Visual

Gauges

tGlass

and

Magnetic

Coupled

Types)

a.

General

Requirements

1.

All

fittings and

valves for

gauges

shall

be of steel unless

the service

requires

different

materials.

2.

All

gauges

shall

be stamped

with

the

maximum working

pressure

and

temperature.

3.

Gauges

on

vaporising service shall

be manufactured

with

oversized chambers.

4.

Expansion

and

contraction

of

gauges

used

on

hot

or

cold

1

e

¡th

sion loops

@ïr0|,, ;:;xx,Gr uP

Date

15-9-94

Rev

pecification Number

01s-JH-1903

Sheet

101 of

163

N

l

2-0056

t/t

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 102/163

5. ln

addition to the

line

class

valve,

all

gauges

shall

be

supplied

with

shutoff

valves

on the

top

and

bottorn

connections

and 112-in.

full-bore

roddable-type

drain and

vent

valves.

Shutoff

valves

shall

be

112-in.

NPT

nipple

connected

of

the

handwheel-operated

quick

action

offset screw-down

type,

with

bolted

bonnets

and

safety

velocity

ball

checks.

6.

For

special

services

using exotic materials,

the

shutoff

valve

may

be

replaced

w¡th

a

112-in. line

class

valve

or

omitted

completely subject

to

Company

approval.

b. Glass

Type Gauges

1.

Glass tube

gauges

shall not be

used.

2. Gauges on

coded

vessels

shall be

code stamped.

All

gauges

shall have

approval

by

Lloyds

or

an

equal body.

3. Gauges

shall comply

generally

with

the

requirements

of

BS

3463.

4.

Gauges

for

caustic

service

shall

be fitted

with

caustic

resistant

inserts.

5.

Gauges

for

cold

service shall

have frost

protection.

6.

Double-plate

and

reflex

gauges

shall

have

forged

steel

columns

and

toughened Borosilicate

glass.

Allowance

shall

be

made

to take

up expansion

without

undue

stress

on

the

instrument

or nozzles.

7. Transparent

gauges

shall

be

backlit

with

an illuminator

suitably certified

for

the

hazardous

area.

A

foot

switch

shall be supplied,

connected

to

the

electrical

system in

such a way

that

the

light

remains

on

for

an

adjustable

period

after

depression

of

the

switch.

The

specification

of

the

electrical items

shall be

in

accordance

with

the

Engineering

Group

Specification

entitled

Electrical

Design, lnstallation

and Testing

(Number

01S-pH-

19011.

8. Extended

gauge

glasses

shall

not

be of

more than four

sections

long.

c

Magnetic

Coupled

Gauges

1.

Two

types

are

acceptable:

Sheet

1O2

ot

163

Date

15-9-94

Rev

pecification

Number

01s-JH-1903

ØtÃ01,?-rynYx,GrauP

Nl 2-0056

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 103/163

a.

Parallel-tube

types having

a

density

balanced

float

in

a

parallel

chamber magnet¡cally

coupled

to

the

float

in

the

process

fluid.

b. Magnetic-indicator

types where

magnetised

flaps

or

balls

with

contrasting

paint

colour

on

each

side

roll

over

as

the

float

magnet

passes

them.

2.

The

chamber

mater¡al

shall

be

316

stainless

steel

unless

the

service

demands

a

higher

specification.

10.5.5 Displacer

lnstruments

a.

The

top

and

bottom

of

the

chamber

shall

be

full-sized

flanged

to enable withdrawal

of

the

disptacer

and cleaning.

b.

The

head

shall

be rotatable

on the flanges

to enable

orientation.

The

required

handing

shall

be

noted

on

the

data

sheet.

Electronic

transmitters

shatl

have

an

output

of

4-20

mA

24-VDC

supply

and

be

certified

in

accordance

with

hazardous

area

and

execution

code

stated in

the

Engin

Group

Specificatio

n

entitled

lnstrument

Engineering

Basic

Data

(Number

01s-JH-1901).

An output indicator

shall

be

provided.

Pneumatic

instruments

shall have

an output

of

O.Z-1.O

barg

(3

to

15

psig)

with

a

suppty

pressure

of

1.4

barg

(20

psig).

An

output

gauge

shall

be

provided.

f

. Displacer

instruments

shall

be

glandless.

g.

Standard

materials

are

1

,

Displacer:

316

staínless steel.

2.

Torque

tube:

lnconel.

h. lnternal

displacers

mây

be

used

where

an

external

arrangement

is

not

possible (e.9.,

sumps).

ln

this

case,

facilitíes

shall

be

provided

to

allow testing

and

routine

maintenance.

All

such

displacers

shall

be

shielded

and

guided,

and

a

means

shall

be

provided

to reta¡n

and

recover

dislodged

displacers.

The

mounting

flange

for

top-mounted

instruments

is

4

in.

unless

a larger

size

is

required.

c

d

e

Sheet

103

of

163

Datê

15-9-94

Rev

pecification

Number

015.JH-1903

Øïr0|.,?,t Y:x^*ouP

cr

N't

2-0056

ril

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 104/163

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 105/163

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 106/163

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 107/163

the

minimum additional

requirements

related

to

level

instruments

only and

shall

not

¡n

any

way

replace

or

reduce

the

general

OA/OC

requirements.

b.

The

test

and

inspection

plan

shall

include

the

following

items

in

addition

to those

found

necessary

by

the

Approved

Manufacturer

to ensure

the

quality

of the

product:

A check of

all

materials

of

construct¡on

by

cross-

comparing the

goods,

the

material

test

certificates

and

the

data

sheets

and

Drawings.

A

check of

the

dimensions

of

the

finished

instruments

against

the

Drawings supplied

for

the

Contract

and

approved

by

the

Company.

3.

A

check

of

the

instrument

and all accessories

in

accordance

with

this

specification

and

the

data sheets

and

Drawings.

4.

Full

testing

of the

instrument

in

accordance

this

specification,

Approved

Manufacturer's

additional

OA/OC

procedures

and

the

approved

Test

and

lnspection

Plan.

5.

A

check

on

the

nameplate

data

¡n

accordance

wíth

this

specification

and

the

data sheets and

Drawings.

6.

A

check

on

the

painting

and

protection

and

general

suitability

for

the

environment.

7. A

check

on

the

tagging

in

accordance

with

this

specification

and the data

sheets.

1

2

10.7.2

Testing

ct

The

pressure enclosures

shall

be

hydrostatically

tested

before

assembly

at

1.5 tímes the

rating

of

the

flanges.

b.

The

instrument

shall

be calibrated

with

a

fluid

having

the

same

properties

as

the

process

fluid.

The

lnstrument

shal¡

be

pressure

tested

as an

assembly at

no

greater

than 1.5

times

the

rating

of

the

flanges,

but

this

figure

shall

be

reduced

if there

is

a

design

restriction

on

pressure

on any

component.

lf

such

restrictíons exist, this

fact

shall

be clearly

marked

on the

instrument

in

English

and

Arabic

languages.

c

Rev

pecification

Number

01s-JH-1

903

@|ffi'åomn **

Sheet

107

of

163

Date

1

5-9-94

Nt

2-OOs6

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 108/163

1O.7.3

Documentation

All

the

certificat¡on

for

each

instrument

or

group

of

instruments

shall þe

collated

in

a Data

Book which

shall be

available at

f¡nal

inspection.

The book shall

include as a

minimum:

a. Completed

test

and

inspection

plan.

b,

Material

certif¡cates

and component

certifícates.

c. NDT certificates.

d.

Weld

procedures

and

qualifications.

e. Pressure

test

certificates.

f.

Test

and

calibration

certif¡cates.

g.

Hazardous

area certificates.

h.

As-built

Drawings

as

necessary.

1O.8

Nameplate

Data

1O.8.1

General

information

for

production

of

the nameplate

data

is

given

in

section

4.7 oÍ

this

specification.

1O.8.2

For level

instruments

the following

additional information

is

required:

a.

Body

material

.

b.

lnternals

mater¡al.

c.

Rating

of

inlet

and

outlet

flange .

d.

Test

pressure

of

complete instrument.

11.O TANK

METERING

11.1

Aoolicable

Slandards

API

Manual

of

Petroleum

Measurement

Standards

-

Chapter

3

-

Tank

Gauging

11.2

Scope of

Tank

Metering Section

ents on

nk

and

storage

1.2.1

This

sect¡on

details

process

measurem

vessels

where

the

selection

criteria

for stated in the

@Ktl, ;:;xx,GrauP

Date

15-9-94

ßev

pecification

Number

015-JH-1903

Sheet

108

of

163

N1 2-0056

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 109/163

  level

instruments

section

of

this

specification

cannot

generafly

be applíed due

to

span resrrictions.

This

specification

applies

to

storage

tanks

only. For

process

vessels

on

which

conventional

process

level

variables

are

requíred

to

be

measured,

for

the

purposes

of local

indicatíon

or

remote

signal

transmissiofl,

the

requirements

are

covered

by

section

1O.O

of

this

specification,

Level

Measurement,

11.3

Tank

Metering.lnsfI-uments

Tvoe

and

Sete,ction

11.3.1

Use

of

Conventional

lnstruments

where

conventional instruments

are

applied

to

tank

level

measurements,

e.9.,

level

switches,

dírect

Dp

measurement,

displacer instrurnents,

etc.,

the

requirements

of

section

lo.o

of

this

specification

shall

be

followed.

Dedicated

level

switches

shall

be

used

for

the

high

and

low

tr¡p

detection.

They

shall

be

displacer

type for

low-level

detection

and

float

type

for

high

level.

11.3.2 Measurement

of

Large

Spans

The

method

of measuring

the

full

span

of

the

tank shall

be

indicated

on

the

P&lD

íssued

for

the

project,

or

if

not indicated

shall

be

agreed

to

wíth the

company

during design

definition.

The

selection

shall

be from

the following

instrument

types:

a.

lnferred

level

measurement,

using

Dp

measurernent

by

a

Dp

transmítter.

The

local

readout

can

be

a

direct

reflection

of

the

calíbration

of

the

transmitter,

or

a

re-transmitted

signal

from

the

DCS

(including

any

specified

corrections

appliedl.

b.

Float-operated

mechanically

linked

indicator

with

position

transmifter.

servo-motor-operated

float or

displacer-type

surface-seeking

systems.

These

shall

be

specified

with

micro-processor_

based

calculation

modules.

d. Badar-type

tank

level

gauges.

e servo-motor

operated

surface-seeking

capacitive

tank

level

gauges.

t.

Sonic

and

ultrasonic

tank

level

gauges

g.

lnductive

tank

level

gauges.

11.2.2

c

Sheet

109

ol

'163

DatÊ

15-9-94

Rev

pecification

Number

01

5-JH-1

903

@r|;ß:*m,Group

N t 2-0056

,1,

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 110/163

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 111/163

2.

Liquid volume:

cubic

metres

(m3).

3.

Mass:

kilogram

(kg).

4.

Density:

kilogram

per

cubic

metre

(kg/m3).

Facilitíes

shall

be installed

on

the

tank

adjacent

to

the

b.

For

DP-based

systems

on

tanks

with

liquid

interface

control,

the

calibrated

range shall

commence above

the

highest

interface

level.

c.

Level

coordination

sketches

showing

all

pertinent

information

shall

be

produced

by

the

Contractor

for

all

applications.

These

shall

be

approved

by

the Company

and

verified

by

the

Approved

Manufacturer

before

order

placement.

d, scales

shall

be

as follows

unless requested

otherw¡se

by

the

Company:

1.

Local

and

remote

level indication:

O-100 .

d

gauging

system

to

enable

manual

gauging

by dip

rod.

complete

system

shall

be

field

calibrated in

accordance

with

all recommendations

in

the

Apl

code

previously

noted.

11.4.2

Requiremenrs

for

Hydrostatic Tank Gauging

System

The

hydrostatic

tank

gauging

(HTG)

system

shall be

ranged

in

accordance

with

the

API

Manual

of

petroleum

Measurement.

Chapter

3.

1

1.4.3

Temperature

Measurement

The

temperature

measurement

shall

be

by

use

of

an

RTÐ. The

RTD

shall

be mounted

in

a

thermowell

mounted

adjacent

to

the

lower

transmitter

tapping

and

penetrating

at

teast

I

m

into

the

process

fluid. The

readout shall

be

ranged

to

cover

frorn

zero

to

the

maximum

possible

process

temperature,

allowing

for

any

increase

due

to ambient

effects.

11.4.4 Oil/Water

lnterface

Measurement

The

oiliwater

interface

detection

shall

be by

use of

an

externally

mounted

displacement

transmitter,

a

capacitance

probe,

or by

another

company-approved

method.

The

range

of

the instrument

shall cover

all

possible

movement

of

the

interface

level,

up to

and

including

the

upper

process

fluid

outlet

level.

Sheet

111

ol

163

Dato

15-9-94

|

Rev

pecification

Number

015-JH-1903

@W,gm:x,*oup

N

1

2-005ô

rr'

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 112/163

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 113/163

for the

process

conditions and

equipment

loads.

Flange finish

and

gaskets

shall be

in accordance

w¡th the tank

specification.

1

1.6.3

The

system shall be

installed

in

accordance

with

the

requirements

of

the

Engineering Group

Specification entitled

 lnstrument

¡nstallation

(Number

01s-JH-1908) and

any

applicable

special notes

contained

in

the

Level

Measuremerìt

section

1O.0

of this specification. All

instruments

shall

be

provided

with isolation

valves

to enable removal for maintenance

without

tank drainage.

1

1.6.4

The

measurement

sensors shall

be

placed

clear

of all

incoming

and outgoing

process

flow

penetrations,

mixers

or distributors

and

any

possible eddy

currents

in

the fluid

etc.

1

1.6.5 The Contractor

shall

provide

at each tank a

telephone

jack

connection for

a

portable

These

shall connect

¡nto

the control

room

system.

11.7

PerfoJr.nance

Requirements

11.7.1

Ouality Control

(OC)

OC

shall be as

detailed

in the

Contract. This section

states

the

minimum

additional

requirements

related to

tank

gauging

systems

only

and

shall

not in

any

way

replace

or

reduce

the

general

OA/OC

requirernents.

b.

The

test

and inspection

plan

shall include

the

followíng items

in

addition to

those found

necessary by the Approved

Manufacturer

to

ensure

the

quality

of the

product:

A

check

of

all

materials

of

construction

by

cross-

comparing

the

goods,

the

rnaterial

test certificates

and

the

data

sheets

and

Drawings.

2.

A

check

of the dimensíons

of the

fÍnished

instruments

against the Drawings

supplíed

for

the

Contract and

approved by

the

Company.

3.

A

check

of

the

instrument

and

all

accessories

in

accordance with

this specification

and the data

sheets

and

Drawings.

junction

box

with

a

telephone handset.

telephone

exchanç

 Æ

l[e,I

\\'ur.\

\\ú'.ôr,

X

a

1

4.

Full

testíng

specification,

of the

instrument in

accordance

this

Approved

Manufactu

additional

OA/OC

procedures

and

the

appro

plan.

pection

Sheet

113of163

Dats

15-9-94

Revpecification

Number

015-JH-1903

Ør|f.,i;y*ffi, -*

rt

12-0056

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 114/163

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 115/163

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 116/163

1. Two

term,

proportional

and

integral

(integral

normally

usedl.

3.

External

auto-manual

station

with bumpless transfer

facility,

4.

Reset

wind-up

prevention.

b.

Combined

transmitter/controller

systems

may

be

offered

for

company

approvãl

when

the

serv¡ce

conditions

are

suitable

for

standard

capsules.

12.2.3

Local

Flow

Controllers

a.

Flow

controllers

shall be

specified

as

follows:

1.

Two term,

proportional and

integral.

2.

Proportionalband

O

to

5OO '

3.

External

auto-manual

station

with bumpless

transfer

facilitY.

4.

Reset wind-uP

Prevention.

'12.2.4

Local

Level

Controllers

a.

Level

controllers

shall

be

specified

as

follows:

not

2.

Proportional

band

0-100

3.

External

auto-manual

station

with

bumpless

transfer

facility.

4.

Reset

wind-up

prevention

b.

Combined

transm¡tter/controller

systems may be offered for

Company

approval

when

the

service

such as

tank heating

upto

300'

C

1572'F)

range.

12.2.5

LocalTemperature

Controllers

a.

Temperature

controllers

shall

be

specified

as follows:

1.

Three

term,

proportional,

integral

and

derivative.

2.

Proportional

band

0 to 250

@ïr0lY,'*w,GrouP

1

Rev

pecilication

Number

01s-JH.1903

Sheet

l16of

163

Dâte

15-9-94

N12-0056

rl,

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 117/163

1

3,

External

auto-manual

facility.

station

with

bumpless

transfer

4,

Reset

wind-up

prevention

b.

Combined

transmitter/controlfers

of

the liquid

or

gas

filled

type

may

be

offered

tor

Company

approval

for

símple

services

such

as

tank

heating

up

to

3o0'c

l572oFl

range.

12.3

Sizing

qnd

Ranoina Reouirements

12.3.1 The

calibrated

range

of

the

controller shall

be the

same

as

the

range

selected for

the

associated

Transmitter.

The

span

shall

be

selected

so

that the

range accounts

for

at

least

50%

of

the

span.

12.3.2

The

scale shall

be

graduated

to

the same

characteristic

as

transmitter

output

unless

external signal

conditioners

indicated

on the

p&lD

.

12.4

Design

and

Construction

12.4.1

General

a.

Local

controllers

shall

be

of

large case design

with

lockable

front.

They

shall be mounted

on

a

2-in.

instrument

stand

or

rear

flange

mounted.

b.

The

movement

shall

be

of

nozzle

and flapper

mot¡on

or

force-

balance

type,

integral

air supply

and

output

gauges

shall

be

f¡tted.

c. lndicating

scales

shall

be

white

with

black

numerals.

units

and

multiplyíng

factors

shall

be

marked

d.

Auto-manual

switch

shall

be

external.

set-point

adjustment

may

be

external

or

internal according

to

the

applícation.

Auto-manual

switch

may

be

substituted

for

remote/balance/auto/manual

when indicated

on

the

p&lD.

An

indÍcator

shall

be

provided

for

the

remote

signal.

e, The

wetted

parts

shall

be

316 stainless

steel

(preferred)

or

bronze.

f

The

signal

ourput

shail

be

O.2

to

1.0

barg

(3

to

15

psíg).

The

action

shall

be

reversible.

The

supply

air

pressure

shall

be 1.4 barg

(20

psig,.

g.

Air

connections shall be

1/4-in,

NpT.

Sheet

117of

163

Dâ1e

15-9-94

Rev

pecification

Number

015-JH-1903

Øl0liJ;gnYx,Gr'uP

:

Nr

2-0056

rp

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 118/163

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 119/163

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 120/163

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 121/163

13.4.3

The

sensor casing

shall be stainless steel.

Local

brackets

shall

be

stainless steel.

13.4,4

Connecting

leads

shall be fully

protected,

as short

as

possible

and terminated

in

an approved certified enclosure.

13.4.5

The

sensors

shall

be immune from radio frequency interference.

13.5

lnstallation

Notes

13.5.1

Detectors

shall

be

installed in

accessible

positions

with

sufficient

protection

to enable

freedom from

damage during operation

and

maintenance.

13.5.2

They

shall

not

be

placed

where

debris

from ruptured

couplings,

shear

pins

etc. can be expected

to impinge.

13.5.3

The

units shall

be

factory

installed

and tested

in

conjunction

with

the

equipment

performance

tests

and

connected

to the

specif

ied

a

mpl

if

ier/inte

grator.

13.6

Performance

Reouirements

13.6.1 Ouality

Control

(OCl

OC

shall be as

detailed

in the

Contract. This section

states

the

mÍnimum

additional

requirements

related

to

speed

measurement

instruments

only

and

shall

not in

any

way

replace

or

reduce

the

general

OA/OC

requirements.

b. The test and

inspection

plan

shall

include

the

following

items

in

addition to those

found

necessary by the Approved

Manufacturer

to

ensure

the

quality

of the

product:

A

check

of

the

instrument

and

all

accessories

in

accordance with

this

specification and the data

sheets

and Drawings.

2. Full

works

calibration

and

issue

of

test and

calibration

certificate.

3.

A

check

on

the nameplate data

in accordance

with

this

specification

and

the

data

sheets

and

Drawings.

4.

A

check

on

the

painting

and

protection

and

general

su¡tability

for

the

environment.

5. A

check

on the tagging

in

specification

and

the

data

sheets.

accordance with

this

a

1

@tí0[31,:x::x^Group

Sheet

12 l

of

163

Date

15-9-94

Rev

pecification

Number

01s-JH-1903

, r

N I

2-0056

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 122/163

13.6.2

Documentation

The following

data

shall

be

avaitable

at

final

inspection:

a.

Completed

Test

and

lnspection

plan.

b. lnstrument

test and

calibration

certíficate.

c.

Hazardous

area

certificates.

13.7

Nameplalp_Da.Îa

General information

for

production

of

the nameplate

data

is

given

in

section

4.7

ot this

specification.

14.0 VIBRATION

SENSING

14.1

Scope

of

Vibration

Sensing

Sectign

This section

covers

the

measurement

of

shaft vibration

sensing

equipment

to

be

installed

at

the

Facility

in

Kuwait.

14.2

Vibration

Sensino

lnstruments

Tvpe

and..Selection

14.2.1

Standard

System

Degrees

of

vibration

shall

be

measured

by

field-mounted

eddy

cufrent

transducers

or

piezo-electric

accelerometers

mounted

at

the

detection

points

on

the X

and

y

axis

of

the

rotating

shaft.

A

contro

room-mounted

integrator,

scaled in

accordance

with

the

limitíng

conditions

applicable

to the

specific

equipment

shall

transmit

the

vibration

rneasurement

as

a 4-2o

mA signal

to

the

Dcs,

ESD

or

interlock

system.

Adjustable

contact

alaim

outputs

shall

also

be available.

14.2.2

Alternative

Systems

other

types

of

system may be

offered

for

company

approval

if

the system

offers

an

equal

standard

of

integrity

and

relíability.

14.2.3

lntegration

with Monitoring

Systems

where

vibration

measurement

is

specified

as

part

of

an

overall

equipment

monitoring

system. The

contractor

shall

ensure

that

the selected

system

is

cornpatible

with

the

equipment

installation

and signal

monitoring

requirements.

Sheet

122

o1

163

Date

15-9-94

Rev

peclfication

Number

01s-JH-1

903

@rif,Ym,Grvup

rr'

l2-0056

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 123/163

14.3

Sizinq-and

Ban

ging

Requirements

The display

scale

shall

be

calculated

so

that

the

maximum

predicted

running

vibration

is

between

600/o

and

80%

of

full

scale'

Gonstfucfion

Reouirements

14.4.1

Vibration

sensors

shall

be

of

robust

construction

suitable

for

service

on

the

specific

type

of

rotating equipment,

taking

into

account

temperature,

lubricants etc.

14.4.2

DupliCate

sensors,

or Complete

Systems

as

necessary,

shall

be

supplied,

allowing

one

unit

to

be serviced

while

the

other

is

on-

line.

14.4.9

The

sensor

casing

and

extension

shall

be

stainless

steel.

Local

brackets

shall

be

sta¡nless

steel.

14.4

14.4.4

Connecting

leads shall

be

fully

protected,

as

short

as

possib

and

terminated

in

an

approved

certifìed

enclosure.

14.4.5

The

sensors

shatl

be

immune

from

radio

frequency

interference'

14.5

lnstallation

NoteF-

14.S.1

Detectors

shall be

installed

in

accessible pos¡tions

with

sufficient

protect¡on

to

enable

freedom from

damage

during

operation

and

maintenance.

14.5.2

The sensors

shall

be

positioned

so that

electromagnetic

fields

close

to the

equipment

do

not affect

the

reading.

14.5.3

They

shall

not be

placed

where

debris

from

ruptured

couplings,

shear

pins

etc.

can

be

expected to

impinge.

14,5,4

The

units

shall

be

factory

installed

and tested

in

conjunction

with

the

equipment

performance

tests

and

connected

to

the

specified

amplifierlinte

grator.

14.6

Performance

Requirements

14.6.1

Ouality

Control

(OC)

OC

shall

be as

detailed

in

the

Contract.

This

section states

the

minimum additional

requirements

related

to

vibration-

senstng

instruments

only

and

shall

not

in

any

way

replace or

reduce

the

genera¡

OA/OC

requirements.

a

@lffi

7,y#iJH,GrouP

Specification

Number

015-JH-1903

Date

15-9-94

Rev

Sheet

123 of

163

Nl 2-0056

rf

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 124/163

A

check

on

the

tagging

in

accordance

specification and

the

data

sheets.

b.

The

test

and inspection

plan

shall include

the

following

items

in

addition

to

those found

necessary

by the

Approved

Manufacturer

to

ensure

the

quality

of the

product:

A

check of

the

instrument and

all

accessories

in

accordance

with

this

specification and

the

data

sheets

and

Drawings.

2. Full

works

calibration

and issue of

test

and

calibration

cert¡f¡cate.

3.

A

check

on

the

nameplate

data in

accordance

with

this

specification

and

the

data

sheets

and

Drawings.

4,

A

check

on

the

paintÍng

and

protection

and

general

suitability

for

the

environment.

1

5

with

th

14.6.2

Documentation

The

following

data

shall

be

available at final inspection:

a.

Completed Test

and

lnspection Plan.

b.

lnstrument

test and

calibration certificate,

c. Hazardous

area

certificates.

14.7 Nameplate Daia

General

information

for

productiòn

of

the

nameplate

data

is

given

in

section

4.7 af

this

specification.

15.O SOLENOID

VALVES

15.1

Apolicable

Standards

Bs

2757

Method for

Determining

the

Thermal

classification

of

Electrical

lnsulation

15.2

$Sop.e

of

Solenoid

Valve

Sgction

This section

details

the

requirements

for

the

application

of solenoid valves

in the

plant

when

used

as

part

of

the

process

control

or

shutdown

system.

Sheet

124

of

163

Date

15-9-94

Rev

pecification

Number

01s-JH-1903

@r|Jv,J;: nyx,Group

N12-0056

,'r

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 125/163

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 126/163

15.3.7

Solenoid

Valves for Venting

Service

For venting

both

sides

of

a

double-acting actuator

(e.9.,

to

enable

manual

override),

two

three-port

valves

shall

be

used.

15.4 Sizing and

Ranqing

Reouirements

15.4.1

Sizing

for

Speed

of

Operation

The minimum

solenoid

valve

size used

shall

have

1/4-in.

NPT

connections

and

a 6-mm

(1/4-in.)

orifice. The

Contractor

shall

not

assume that

this

is

adequate

to

achieve

the

required

speed

of

operation

without

verification

of each case

taking

into

account

the

completed installation

of

actuated

valve/connect¡ng

tube/solenoid

valve/exhaust

arrangement.

15.4,2

Sizing for Process

Service

ln

cases

where

the

Company

has

approved

the use of a

sole

valve for

direct

process

duty,

each

application

shall

be

s

against the

operating

conditions.

15,5

Construction

Requirements

15.5.1

General

Solenoid

vafves

shall be

direct-acting,

spring-return

type and

shall

be

robustly

constructed

for

heavy

industrial

use.

The coil

and

spring

shall be selected to

provide

ample operational

power

to

position

the

valve

stem correctly under all

conceivable

service

conditions.

An

external

earth stud

shall be

provided.

15.5.2

Design

Rating

The design

pressures

shall be as

follows

(minimum

requirements):

{to

be according

to service requirements

but

not less

than

1.5 x

process

design figure)

Processes

Service

(to

be according

to

individual

requirements

but

not

less than

the

blocked-in

pump

head)

Hydraulic

Service

8.5

barg

(125

psigl

12.0

barg

{175

psig)

Pneumatic

Service

Operating

Mechanical

-@

Shêet

126

of

163

Date

15-9-94

Rev

pecification

Number

01

s-JH-1

903

@ïr0|., ;gxm^GrouP

N1

2-0056

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 127/163

15.5.3

Coil

Rating

coils

shall

be

rated

for

continuous

operat¡on

when

connected

to

the efectrícal

suppty

stated in

the

Engineering

Group

specification

entitled

lnstrument

Engineering

Basic

Data

(Number

01S-JH-19011.

The

temperature

must

not

rise

ro

more

than

70'c

(158 F),

(or

the coil

service

rating

if lower)

when

used

at

the

ambient

conditions

prevalent

at

the

Facility

and with

the

sun shielding

and heat

dissipation/cooling

arrangements

provided

by the

Contractor.

15.5.4

Coil

lnsulation

Coil

insulation shall

be

Class

A

to

BS

27SZ

(minimum),

and

a

surge

suppression

device

shall

be

fítted

within

the

terminal

enclosure.

15,5.5

Terminations

lntegral

terminals

shall

be

provided

for

the

termination

of

cabling.

Flying

leads

extending

from

the

coil

enclosure

are

not

acceptable.

15.5.6

Electrical

Entry

The

electrical

entry shall

be

lso

metric

threaded

to

M2o

x

1.5

mm.

15.5.7

Body

Materials

Pneumatic

solenoid

valves

shall

be constructed

of brass

or

stainless

steel

body,

stainless

steel

trim

and

cast iron

enclosure.

Aluminium

enclosures

are

acceptable

only

if fully

epoxy

painted.

b.

All

solenoid

valves

shall

be

stainless

steel in

cases

where

Hrs

is

present

in

any

part

of

the

process

in

sufficíent

quantity

to

warrant

the

need

for

materials

to

be

selected

and

manufactured

in

accordance

with

the

NACE

code

MRo175.

This

is

to

enable

the

valve

bodies

to

resist

the

Hrs

that will

be

present

in

the

atmosphere.

c. For

process

servíce,

the

body

and

trim material

shall

be

suitable for

the

process

fluid

and

design

conditions,

with

316

stainless

steel

as

a

minimum

requirement.

d. The

selection

of

seal

material

shall

be

pproved

Manufacturer's

recommendation

for

and

environmental conditions

c,

Sheet

127

of

163

Date

15-9-94

Rev

pecification

Number

01

s-JH-

1

903

@10|.,,;:m:x,Gr.up

N

1 2-0056

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 128/163

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 129/163

I

3. A

check

of the

instrument

and

all

accessories

in

accordance

wìth this

specification and

the

data

sheets

and

Drawings.

4. A

check

on

the nameplate

data

in

accordance

with

this

specification

and

the data sheets

and

Drawings,

5. A

check on

the

painting

and

protection

and

general

suitability for

the

environment.

6.

A

check

on

rhe

tagging

in

accordance

with

this

specification

and

the data

sheets.

15.7.2

Testing

The

solenoid

valves

shall

be

tested

during

accordance

with

Approved

Manufacturer's

system.

manufacture

in

quality

control

15,7.3

Documentation

All

the cert¡f¡cation for

each

instrument

or

group

of

instrumen

shall

be collated in

a

Data

Book

which

shall

be

available

at fina

inspection.

The

book

shall

include

as

a

minimum:

a.

Completed

test

and

inspection

plan.

b.

Certificate

of

works

test

and

conformity

c.

Hazardous

area

certificates.

15.8

Namenlate

Data

General

information

for

production

of

the

nameplate

data

is

given

in

section

4.7

of

this

specification.

16.0

SIGNAL

CONVERTORS

16.1

ScoBe

of

Signal Gonverter Section

This section

details

the

requirements

of

signal

convertors

for use

in

signal

transduction

and

manipulation

of

pneumatic

and

electronic

signals used

in

instrument control

loops.

16.2 Siqnal Converters.Tyge

and

Selectig_[

16.2.1

Current

to Pneumatic

Conversion

(l/P)

Conversion

of

a

control

room

4-20

mA a

0.2

to

Sheet

129

of 163

Date

1

5-9-94

Rev

pecification

Number

016-JH-1903

@101,# m:x,GrouP

N12-0056

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 130/163*

o

ú

J}

1.0

barg

(3

to

15

psig)

pneumatic

signal

shall

normatly

be

by

use

of

a 2-wire

loop powered l/P

convertor.

For

control

valve

service

in

non-vibrating

applications,

and if

approved

by

the

Company,

EIP

positioners

(where

the signal conversion

is

an integral

part

of

the valve

positioner)

may

be

used.

16.2.2

Pneumatic

to Current

Convertors

(P/l)

Conversion

of a

field

pneumatic

signal

for

transmission

to

the

control

roorn

as

an

electronic

signal shall

be

by

use

of

a

2-wire

loop

powered

P/l

convertor.

1

6.2.3

Miscellaneous

Convertors

and

Conditíoners

Fiefd-mounted

devíces

shall be

used

where

depícted

on the

p&lD

for

signal

processing

such as square

root

extraction,

high

and

low

selection, multiplying

and

delay

services.

16.3

Sizíng

Retuirements

16.3.1

The

pneumatic

output flow

rate

from

convertors

shall

checked

against

the

maximum

air

requirement

of

the

Pneumatic

relays

and boosters

shall

be

used

as

necess

ensure

an

adequate

supply

of air.

ary

16.3.2

Current

to

pressure

{l/P}

and

pressure

to

current (p/l}

convertors

shall

be

field

adjustable

and

ranged

so that 4-2o

mA corresponds

to

0.2 to

1.0

barg

(3

to

15

psig),

unless

required

otherw¡se

by

the

service.

16.3.3

split

ranges

shall

be accomplished

by

using

two

outputs

from

the

DCS, each

scaled at

O-100

o/o.

ln

this

case,

each

valve will

have

an

individual

l/P

convertor

scaled

0.2

to 1.O

barg

{3

to

lb

Psig).

16.3.4

where

split

range

control

using one

electroníc

output

is requ¡red

eg.

0.2

to

O.6

barg

(3

ro

9

psig)

and

O.6

to

1.0

barg

(9

ro

15

Þsig)

signals

to

each valve respectively,

one

l/P

convertor

shall

be used

and

the

split

ranging

shall

be

carried

out

at

the

positioners.

16.3.5

Other

ranges

Company.

may

be

specified

with

the

agreement

of

the

16.4

Construction

Hequiremen_tg

16,4,1

llP

Convertors

Sheet

1

30

of 163

Datg

15-9-94

Rev

pecification Nurnber

015-JH-1903

Ø10|,,?,: mx^Group

Nl2-OO56

rl,

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 131/163

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 132/163

protective

box,

or

mounted

on

a

substant¡al

plate

and

a

cover

provided.

16,5.5 Sun

shielding

is

required

for

all convertors

16.6 Performance

Requirements

16.6.1 Ouality Control

(OC)

OC shall

be as detailed

in

the

Contracl.

This

section

states

the minimum additional

requirements

related

to signal

convertors only

and

shall

not

in

any

way replace

or

reduce

the

general

OA/OC requ¡rements.

b.

The

test

and

inspecl¡on

plan

shall

include

the

following

items

in

addition

to

those found

necessary

by the

Approved

Manufaclurer to

ensure

the

quality

of

the

product:

A

check

of

the

dimensions

of the finished

items

against

the

Drawings

supplied

for the

Contract

and

approved by

the Company.

2. A

check

of

the

equipment

and all

accessories

in

accordance

with

this specification

and

the

data

sheets

and

Drawings.

3.

Functional

test¡ng

of

instruments

in

accordance

with

this

specifícation,

Approved

Manufacturer s

additional

OA/OC

procedures

and

the

approved

test and

inspection

plan.

4.

A check on

the nameplate

data

in

accordance

with

this

specification and

the

data

sheets and Drawings.

5. A

check

on

the

painting

and

protection

and

general

suitabil¡ty

for

the environment.

6. A

check

on

the

tagging

ín

accordance

with

this

specification

and

the data

sheets.

16.6.2

Testing

lnstruments

shall

be

function

tested and calibrated.

16.6.3

Documentation

All

the

certification

for

each

instrument

or

group

of

instruments

shall

be

collated

in

a

Data Book wh

vailable

at

final

inspection.

ïhe

book shall include

a

1

6

Sheet

132

of

163

Date

1

5-9-94

l

Rev

pecification

Number

01s-JH-1903

@ïr0l ,Jfm,GrouP

:.

1:

r

I

Í

I

l

;

4

rL

d

N12-0056

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 133/163

a.

Completed

Test

and

lnspection Plan

b.

Hazardous

area

certificates

16.7 Nameolate Data

General

informatíon

for

production

of

the

nameplate

data

is

given

in

the

section 4,7 of

this

specification.

17.O

POSTT|ON

SWTTCHES

17.1

Scooe

of

Positíon

Switches Sectiqn

17

.1.1

This

section details

the

des¡gn

and

applicatíon

of

all

switches

installed

to

detect

the

limit

or

intermediate

position

of

valve

stems,

dampers,

safety

devices or

other

items

requiring

an

electrical

transmission

of a

fixed

position.

This

specifícation

shail

be

applicable to

switches

on

all

equipment

and

packages

to

be

installed

at the

Facility

in

Kuwait.

17.1.2 This

section does

not

detail

position

transm¡tters

used

for

cont¡nuous

feedback

of

the

position

of

a moving

part.

17.2

Position Switches Type

and

Selection

17.2.1

Switches

shall be of the

inductive proximity

type,

communicatÍng

with

an

ls

amplifier mounted

in

the

main

control

block

auxiliary room.

The amplifier

shall

give

volt-free

conract

outputs

1o

the DCS

and

ESD

equipment

as

necessary.

17.2.2 Conventional

contact-type

mechanical

action

lîmit

switches

shall

only

be

used

in

specific

applications when

approved

by

the

Company,

When

used,

they

shall

be

in

mechanical

fail-safe

mode,

i.e.,

the

spring

act¡on

shall

push

the

follower

toward

the

actuatíon

point

(inverse

cam

or

hole

etc.),

so

that a stuck

switch

cannot

be

interpreted

as

a safe

position,

such

switches

shall

use

environmentally sealed

switch

contacts

of

noble metal

suitable

for

low-energy

signals.

17.2.3 Proximíty

switches

shall

be

purchased

as

sets

ready

mounted

and

terminated in

a

sealed

enclosure

containing

the

switch

adjustment

and

actuation

system, The

only

exposed

part

shall

be

the

actuation

shaft

emerging

from a sealing gland

at

the

rear

of

the

box.

This

shall be

driven

by

the

moving part

which

is

to be

posit¡on

detected.

17.2.4

External

proximity

switches

may

be

restrictions

preclude

the

use of

enclosed

used

when

space

h

approval

from

the

Company,

and

provided

that

the

ted in

a

Shaet

133

of

163

Date

 t5-9-94

Rev

pacification

Number

01

5-JH-1903

@l0l ;:;x:x,Group

N12-0056

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 134/163

pos¡t¡on

safe

from

the

possibility

of

mechanical

damage

during

operation and maintenance

activities.

Such

switches

shall be

of

flying

lead

type, terminated

in

an lP

65

enclosure adjacent

to the

switch.

The

length

of the

flying lead

shall be

minimised,

and

shall

be

protected

throughout

its

length.

17.2.5

The

actuation element

shall

be an

unambiguous

pärt

of

or

addition

to the

rnoving

part

of the

valve

etc.,

chosen

to

be

free

of

accidenta¡

corruption

by

tools

etc.

17.2.6

The

adjustment

facilities

shall be

locked

after setting

by

drilling

and

pinning.

17.3

Svstem

Requ¡rempnlg

17.4

The

switch

system consists

of the

field

proximity

device and

the

control

room amplifier.

These

items

shall

be

selected

with

matching

characteristics

in regard

to

the

performance

and the lS

certification

requirements,

The amplifying devices

shall be

of

rack

or

de-mountable

zt,

rail-mounted

type

and

shall be

installed

in

the

standard

interface

cabinetff

in

the

control

block auxiliary

room.

(t,

(

construct¡on

Reouirements

WS

\

17.4.1

The

switches shall

be the

Approved Manufacturer's

standard

units, certified

for

use

in

an lS circuit. They

shall

be

mounted

in

boxes sealed

to a

minimum

standard

lP65

constructed

of

reinforced

polyester,

stainless

steel or

cast

iron. Terminals

within

the box shall

be

blue

for

lS circuits.

Electrical

entries shall

be

size

M2O

1.5 lSO.

17.4,2

All

external línkages,

brackets,

mountings

etc. shall be

sta¡nless

steel

with

staínless steel fasteners.

17.5

fnstallation

Notes

17.5.1

All

equipment shall be positioned

with

due

regard

to

access for

maintenance.

Wherever

possible,

the switches

shall

be

mounted

away from

any vibrating

equipment, the

coupling

system

being

designed

to

suppress

transmission

of

harmful

vibrations.

17.5.2

Where

individual

externally mounted

proximity

switches

have

been

allowed,

the

actuating element

is

preferably

a

ferrous

or

magnet¡c

part

fastened

securely

to

a stainless

steel

mov¡ng

part.

Where

this

is

not

possible,

the

extension

of

the

actuating

part

shall

be sufficient

to ensure

that

accidental

actuation

of the

switch

is not

possible

under afl

conditions,

including

rnovements

caused

by

wear

etc

Sheet

1

34

of

163

Date

15-9-94

Rev

pecification

Number

0r s-JH-1903

Øl0llffixx,Group

N

r2-0056

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 135/163

17.6

Performance

Requirements

1

7.6.1

Quality

Control

(OC)

Quality

Control

shall

be as

detailed

in

the

Contract.

This

section

states

the

minimum

additional

requirements

related

to

pos¡tion

switches

only and

shall not in

any

way

replace

or

reduce

the

general

OA/OC

requirements.

b.

The

test

and

inspection

plan

shall

include

the

foltowing

items

in

addition

to

those found

necessary

by

the Approved

Manufacturer

to ensure

the

quality

of

the

product:

A

check

of

the

switch

and

all

accessories

in

accordance

with

this

specification

and the

data

sheets

and

Drawings.

2.

A check

on

the nameplate

data

in

accordance

with

this

specification

and the

data sheets

and

Drawings.

3. A

check

on

the tagging

in

accordance with

this

specification

and

the

data sheets.

17.6,2

Documentation

The

following

data shall

be available

at final

inspection:

a.

Completed

Test

and lnspection

Plan.

b.

Hazardous

area

cert¡fícates.

17.7 Nam.ppla.tlÞata

General

information

for

production

of

the nameplate

data

is

given

in

section

4.7

of this specifÍcation.

18.O FLAME

DETECTION

18.1 Scqp-e

gf

Flgme

Detection

System

This

section covers

the

design

and applícation

of flame

detection

devices

used

for verifying

the

presence

of flame

at

the

burner

or

pilot

of

fired

equipment

installed

at

the

Facility

in Kuwait.

18.2 Flame Detection

Tyoes

and

Selection

18.2.1

Main

Burner

Flame

Detection

a.

Ultraviolet

(UV) detectors

of

the

se

e

shall

be

a

Sheet

135 of

163

Date

15-9-94

Rev

pecification

Number

o15-JH-1903

@frÏf,7,{:# H,G'rouP

i

I

I

I

¡

t

lr

fl

I

Z:

.lr

ú.

*

N12-0056

r/-

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 136/163

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 137/163

18.3 Svstem

Reouirements

1 8.3.1 Scope

Flame

detection

equ¡pment

shall

comprise

a

flame

detection

sensor

and

a

flame

detector

amplifier/switch

unit.

18.3.2

Self-Checking

Ffame

viewers

shall

be

of the automatic

self-checking

type

having

the

rotating

shutter

interlocked

with

the

output

to

produce

a

continuous

signal of

the true flame

state.

18.3.3

Discrimination

The flame

sensor shall

be mounted

on the burner

front

or

other suitable

location

where it is

able to view

the

intended

flame, whilst

discriminating from

other

flames

as

necessary,

a

b.

lt

is

a

requirement

that

where

a

continuous

pilot

is

used,

main

flame viewer

shall

not

see the

pilot

flame.

the

A main

burner

viewer

shall not

see

the

flame

of any

burner

or

pilot.

d.

A

pilot

viewer may see

its

associated main

flame

but

no

other.

18.3.4

Flame Amplifier

The flame

arnplifier

shall be

mounted in

the

interface

rack in

the main

control

block auxiliary

room. The

use

of

systems

that

require

field

amplification

or

relay

stations

shall

require

Company

approval.

b. The

amplifier relay

shall

have

two

noble

metal

changeover

output

contacts, one

normally

open and

one

normally

closed.

c.

The

amplifier

shall

have

signal

output

terminals

suitable

for

the connection

of

a

f

lame strength

indicator,

or

for

permanent

or

future

connect¡on

to the

DCS

input

system

for

display.

18.4

Construction

Requirements

18.4.1 Enclosure

a.

The flame

detector sensor

shall

be of

weatherproof

construct¡on and

have

a

flange

or

su

ded

union

c

a

Sheet

1 37 of 163

Date

15-9-94

Rev

pecification

Number

015-JH-1903

ØKM'{, I# H,Group

N12-0056

rp

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 138/163

mounting

to the

tapping

nozzle,

b.

The

enclosure

shall

be

certified

for

use

in

the

hazardous

area

surrounding

the heater

location.

Systems

requiring

continuous

air

purge

for

certification

purposes

are

not

permitted.

18.4.2 Mounting

a. Viewer-type

sensors

shall

be

mounted

on

adjustable,

lockable

swivel

joints

to

effect

accurate

alignment.

This

requirement

can

be

waived

if

the

company

is

satisfied

that

the burner/viewer

arrangement

is

of

completely

standard

proven

design

where

the

fixed alignment is

ensured.

b.

There

shall

be

a

cooling/purging

air

connection

on

the nozzle.

Air

shall

only

be

connected

if

stipulated

by

the

Company.

18.4.3

RedundantViewers

f

re

d

U

nda

nt VI

ewrn

g

ty

pe

s

e

nso

rs

are used

rh

e

tap

p

tn

g

nozzl

ã

s

hal h

ave

a fu r-b

o

re

so at¡o

n

VA

VE

ncorporat

ed

to

e

na

b

isolation

of

the

tapp¡ng when

the detector

is

removed

for

cleaning.

18.5

lnstallatÌon

Notes

18.5.1

All detectors

shall

be installed

with

sufficient

cable

stack to

enable full

withdrawal

without

d¡sconnect¡on.

18.5.2

Nozzle lengths

shall

be sufficient

to carry

the

viewer

head

clear

of

the

burner

hot

zone,

Heat

insulators

shall

be

fitted

as

necessary

to

ensure

the instrument

does not

rise

above

the

lower

of

its design

temperature

or

70o C

{1Sg F}.

18.6 Performance

Reouirements

18.6.1

Ouality Control

(OC)

a.

oc

shall

be

as

detailed in

the contract.

This

section

states

the

minímum

additional

requirements

related

to flame

detectors

only

and

shall

not

in

any

way

replace

or

reduce

the

general

OA/OC

requirements.

b. The

test

and inspection

plan

shall

include

the

followíng

Ítems

in

addition

to

those

found

necessary

by

the

Approved

Manufacturer

to

ensure

the

quality

of

the

product:

A

check

of

the

instrument

a

accordance

with

this

specificatio

ies in

l:li

heets

Sheet

138

ol

163

Date

1

5-9-94

Rev

pecification Number

015-JH.1903

l

i

I

I

t

N12-0056

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 139/163

and Draw¡ngs.

2,

Full works calibration

and issue

of test

and

calibration

cert¡f¡cate.

3.

A check

on the

nameplate

data

in

accordance

with

this

specification

and

the data

sheets

and

Drawings.

4. A

check

on the

painting

and

protection

and

general

suitability

for

the

environrnent.

5.

A

check

on the tagging

in

accordance

with

this

specification

and

the

data

sheets.

18.6.2

Documentation

The

followíng

data shall

be available

at

final

inspection:

a.

Completed

test

and

inspection

plan.

b. lnstrument

test

and

calibration

certificate.

c. Hazardous

area

certificates.

18.7

Nameolate

Data

General

information

for

production

of

the

nameplate

data

is

given

in

section

4.7

of this

specification.

1

9.O

MISCELLANEOUS

INSTRUMENTS

19.1 Aoplicable

Standards

BS

55O1

Electrical

Apparatus

for

Potentially

Explosive Atmospheres

19.2

Scope

of

M¡scellaneous.lnstru"ment

Sect¡on

19.2.1 This section covers

the

requírements

for

miscellaneous

instruments

to

be

used

on

equipment

to

be

installed

at

the

Facility

in

Kuwait.

19.2.2

Miscellaneous

instruments

are

defined

as:

Field items which

are

identified by a tag number

on

the

P&lD,

but

are

of

a

type not specifically

covered

by the other

sections within

this specification

(refer

to

the

Contents

page,

page

2).

a

b. ltems

provided

by

a

Conrractor as

packaged

or

proprietary píece

of

part

of a

ich

can

Sheet

139

of

'l

63

Date

15-9-94

Rev

pecification

Numbor

01 5-JH-1903

@fitil':, #YH,G'louP

N1

2-00s6

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 140/163

reasonably be

described

as an

instrument

or control

item.

This shall apply even

if

the

item

does

not

appear

on

the

P&lD and has

not

been

allocated

a

tag

number.

19.3

Selection

19.3.1

Instruments

classified as

Miscellaneous

under

the

above

description

may

only

be supplied

¡f

alternative

instruments

selected from the

other

sections

of this specification will not

adequately

perform

the

required function.

19.3.2

Miscellaneous

instruments

shall

be selected

in

accordance

with

parameters

set

in

this specification

for

similar

types,

with

respect

to

power

supplies

and

signal levels,

hazardous

area

protection

methods, fínishing, weatherproofing

and all

pertinent

requirements.

All

miscellaneous

instruments

require

Company

approval

before

selection.

lnstruments

not

complying with

the

general

parameters

shall

be rejected.

19.4

Sizing

and

Ranoing

Requirements

The

display scale

shall

be calculated so that

the

max¡mum

predicted

operat¡ng

point

is

between

6O% and 8O% of full scale.

19.5

Constfuction

Requirements

19.5.1

All miscellaneous

instruments

shall

be

of

robust

construction

suitable

for

service

in

the

stated

environment

and

particular

service conditions.

They

shall be

of

the same standard and

quality

as

is

required

in

this

specification

for similar

items.

19.5.2 ltems

contain¡ng

electrical

parts

shall

be

certified

as suitable

for

the

hazardous

area

by a

recognized

European

testing author¡ty

and

be

in

accordance with

BS

5501.

19.5.3 Any coils, contacts etc.

shall

be

environment free

encapsulated

type. Contacts shall be

noble

metal.

19.5.4

Environmental

protection

shall

be

provided

to

the

required

standard lP 65

rninimum.

19.5.5

Stainless steel

is

the

preferred

material of construct¡on,

Other

materials

may be

used

if

suitable for the service,

and

must

be

adequately

protected

to

withstand

the

environmental

conditions,

an epoxy

paint

finish

or

hot

dip

galvanising

are

.acceptable

systems,

Cadmium

plating

is

not

accepted

as

a

final

finìsh.

19.5.6

Transparent

parts

shall

be of shatterproof

hanically

protected where

possible.

Sheet

140

of

163

Date

15-9-94

Revpacification

Number

01s-JH-1903

@101,?;gnxx,*ouP

N

1 2-0056

ry

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 141/163

19.5.7 Electrical

items

shall

have

integral

terminals. Flying

leads are not

acceptable.

19.5.8

Electrical

entries

shall

be

M2O

x

1.5

lSO.

19.5.9

Pneumatic

connections

shall

be 1/4-in.

NPT.

19.5.10

Process

connections

shall

be

300

lb

flanged

(minimurn)

or

112-in.

NPT

for line-mounted and impulse-connected

items

respectively.

19.5.11

Sensors

shall

be

immune

from

radio

frequency

interference.

19.6

lnstallation

Notes

lnstallation

shall be

carried

out

in

accordance

with

the

Engineering

Group

Specification entitled

lnstrument

lnstallatis¡

{Number

O1s-JH-19O8)

as

related

to

similar

instruments

described

in

this

specification

and

the

part¡cular

requirements

of

the specific

instrument.

19.7

Performance

Requirements

19.7.1

Ouality

Control

(OC)

OC shall

be

as

is

detailed

in

the

Contract. This

section states

the

minimum

additional requ¡rements

related

to

miscellaneous

instrurnents

only and

shall

not

in

any

way

replace

gr

reduce

the

general

OA/OC requ¡rernents.

b.

The

test

and inspection

plan

shall

include

the following

items

in

addition

to

those

found

necessary

by

the Approved

ManufacturBr

to ensure

the

quality

of the

product:

1.

A

check

of

the

instrument

and all

accessories in

accordance

with

thls

specifícation

and the

data

sheets

and

Drawíngs.

2. Full

works

calibration

and

issue

of test

and

calibration

certificate.

3.

A

check

on

the

nameplate

data in

accordance

with

this

specification

and

the data sheets

and Drawings.

4.

A

check

on

the

painting

and

protection

and

general

suitabifity for

the

environment.

5.

A

check

on the

tagging

in

accordance

with

this

specifícation

and

the

data

sheets.

E

&

ct

Shê6t

14'l

of

163

Datg

15-9-94

Rov

pocification

Number

015-JH-1903

Øw,';ylxx,Grcup

¿

.b

o

ú

)t

N12-0056

r//

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 142/163

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 143/163

20.3.3 For

analysers

on

critical duties,

ê.g,

on

safety systems,

consideration

shall

be given

to

redundancy techniques.

Detailed

proposals

shall

be submitted

to the Company

for

approval

in

alf

cases

where an

analyzer

output

is

vital

to

a

safety function.

20.3.4 Analysers

shall

be

used

on

síngle

streams

unless

multi-stream

applications

are

approved by

the Company,

2O.4

L?ing,

and

ßqnqing

Requirements

20.4.1

The

range

selected

shall

cover

the

full

scale

of

variation

possible

on

the

variable

subjected

to

analysis.

The normal

operating

point

shall

preferably

be

at the midpoint

of the

scale.

20.4.2

lndicating

and

control

functions

shall

be

carried

out by

the

plant

DCS.

Wherevef

possible,

serial

data links

te,g.,

RS

422

etc.)

shall be used

to

transm¡t analytical

data

to

the

DCS; isolated

4-

2O

mA

signals shall

also be made

available.

20.4.3

Where

a

separate

safe area

interface

module

is

an

essential

part

of the

system,

this shall

be in

the unmanrred

auxiliary room

in

the

control

block.

All necessary

outputs

displayed

on

the

interface

unit

must be

presented

as repeats

to

the

DCS.

20,4.4

For

ease

of

maintenance, analysers

shall have

also

have

local

indicators

wherever

practicable.

Local

panel

display

facilities

shall

be

provided

where

the

individual indication

is not

v¡sible at

the

analyzer.

20.4.5

For

instruments

requiríng

field

operator attent¡on,

e.9.,

those

in

the

analyzer

house,

test

displays, alarms

etc.

shall

be located

in

a

readily

accessible

position

for

maíntenance. Purge

alarms

shall

be

readily

visible

to

the

operator.

24.4.6

Analysers

on

closed

loop

control

through

the

DCS

shall

operate

through

a cascade

loop.

The range

of

set-point adjustment

of

the

slave controller shall

be

restricted

within

preset

high and

low

limits.

Alarms

shall

be actuated

(after

a brief

time

delay)

to

warn

the

DCS

operator

if

the

output

from

the

analyzer

attempts

to

exceed these limits.

20.5

Construction

RequiremeJ0ts

20.5.1 General

All

analysers

shall be microprocessor

based

and

be

provided

with

self-diagnostic

and

calibration functions.

a

Shest

143

of

163

Date

15-9-94

Rev

pecilication

Number

01

5-JH-1 903

@ftil':fm,Group

N1 2-0056

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 144/163

b'

Analysers

shall

be

suitable for

the specified

environmental

exposure.

c,

All

parts

exposed

to

the

process

shall

be

suitable

for

the

pressure

and

temperature

and resistant

to

the

specified

fluid,

and

will

be

constructed

of stainless

steel

grade

316

as

a

minimum.

Alternative

materials

such

as

Monel,

Hastelloy

or

lnconel

shall

be

supplied

where

necessary.

d.

All

components

exposed

to

process

fluid

on

sour

service

shall

comply

with

the

requirements

of

NACE MRO175.

e. Analysers

shall

be

certified

for

use

in

hazardous

areas

classified

Zone

1,

as

a

minimum.

Non-certified

analysers

may

be

installed

in

certain

servíces when

the

analyzer

is

to

be

mounted

in a

safe

areê,

or

an analyzer

house

made

safe

by

purging,

gas

detection

and

electrical

supply

isolation

procedures.

Such

applications

are

subject

to

Company

approval

and

shall

only

be allowed

when

the

composition

or

arnount

of the

sample inside

the

analyzer

is

insufficient

to

produce

an

explosive

or

ignitable

mixture

in

the

event of

component

fa¡lure

or leakage.

f.

Analyzer

power

supplies

shall

be

24 VDC

or

1 1O

V

+

l_

1Qo/ ,

5O

Hz

I

l-

2o/o.

g. Sensit¡v¡ty

shall

be

+t-

llTo/o

ol

span, with

re

producibility

*

l-

1o/o

or better

h

Analyzer

outputs

shall

be

4-2O

mA

wherever

possible

and

shall

be

linear

over

the specified

range.

Alarm

or other

digital

outputs

shall

be by

volt-free

contact,

on

segregated

terminals

suitable

for

lS

circuits.

Analysers

requiring

manual

restart

after

a

power

failure

shall

be

protected

from

shutdown

by

a

power

failure

of

4

seconds

or

less.

Routine

maíntenance

shall

be

possible

without

disturbing

the

operation

or

location

of

the analyzer,

and

shall

not

be

more

frequent

than

once

every

7

days.

Analysis

times

shall

be

as

short

as

possible,

and

in

all

control

applications

including

alarm

and

protective

systems,

the

permissible

analysis

t¡mes

shall

be

agreed

to

by

the

Company.

TER

k

Sheet

144

of

163

Date

15-9-94

Rev

pecification

Number

01s-JH-1903

@l0l'g,x:x,*ouP

N12-0056

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 145/163

@ïr0ll:íf m,*ouP

20.5,2 Sampling Systems

Sampling

systems shall comprise

all

equipment

necessary

to

provide

the analyzer

with

a continuous sample representative

of the

process

stream

to be measured, The

sample

shall

be

reta¡ned

within

temperature

and

pressure

conditions

specified for

the

analyzer.

b. The

delay

time

between

the

sample being

withdrawn

from

the

process

and being

made available

to

the analyzer shall

be

as short as

possible

and shall not exceed five minutes

for

monitoring

applications

and three

m¡nutes

for

control

applications. Shorter

periods

shall

be

provided

according

to

the

process

requirernent.

Samples

shall be drawn

from

a

point

in

the

process

where

stream conditions

are

such that the

minimum

of

sample

conditioning

is

necessary,

This

requirement

is

subject

to

acceptable

process,

sampling and analysis

lag.

d.

For

direct

process

connected

analysers,

fast

sample

loops

shall

be

provided.

Where

process

conditions

do not

favour

self-powering,

the sample

shall

preferably

be driven

by

sample

pump

located

close to the

sample

takeoff

poi

Pumps

shall not

be

placed

inside analyzer housings

unle

this

is

demanded

by control considerations

or other

samplí

difficulties.

e Circulating

loops

may

be used,

return¡ng

the sample to a

lower

pressure

point

in

the

same

process

system.

These

may

be used

in

the

bypasses

to

pumps,

across vessels

and

other

process

elements.

Samples

shall

not be

taken

across

orifice

plates

used

for

flow

measurement. Samples may

be

taken

across

control valves

provided

the sample

flow

is

too

small

to

affect

the control

application, and

the

pressure

drop

across

the

valve

is always

sufficient

to

ensure an

adequate

sample

flow

rate.

Restriction

devices shall

not

be

placed

in

the

líne

to

cause

a

pressure

drop

for

circulating

sample takeoff.

g.

The return

points

of

circufating

and bypass

samples shall

be

selected

so that the

pressure

is

at

least

2

bar

(30

psi)

above

the

vapour

pressure

of the

sampfe.

h.

Secondary

fast

loops,

where a relatively large

volume

fast

loop

or

circulating loop

flow

bypasses

an

analyzer

and

the

analyzer

sample is

supplied by

a fast

loop

from

this bypass,

shall

be used

to

maintain

transport

velocity

and reduce

time

a

c

f

Sheet

145

0f 163

Dåte

15-9-94

Specification

Number

015-JH-1903

1

Rev

N12-00s6

lag

This

method shall

be

used

for

field-m

lysers

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 146/163

1

Rev

pecification Number

01

5,JH-1903

@l|¡f;::mx,G,oup

Date

15-9-94

Sheet

146

of

163

only and

care shall

be taken to ensure

that

the

final

sample

line volume

is

small in relation

to analyzer

sample

consumpt¡on.

i. Secondary fast loops

shall only

be used

in

the following

casesl

1.

Sample conditioning equipment

causes

time

lags.

2. To reduce

the

amount of sample entering

the analyzer

house.

j.

The

takeoff

for

a secondary

fast

loop

shall

be a restriction ¡n

the

primary

fast loop,

adjustable

so that the DP

can

be

selected

to

give

optimum

performance.

k.

Unless

a

fast loop

is

provided,

process

samples

shall be

drawn

by

probes

constructed

to API RP

550,

Part

2,

Figures

14-2

and 14-3.

For lines

below

100-mm

(4-in,)

diameter,

the

length

of the

stub

connect¡on

shall be

increased

so that

the

probe

insertion

is not

greater

than one

quarter

of

the

line

díameter.

Circulating

loop materials,

i.e.,

tubing

from

sample

point

main

filter

and

from

filter

to return

point,

shall be

the sa

as

the

line

or

vessel

from

where

the

sample

is

drawn.

The

filter

shall also

be compatible

with

the line

class.

m. Analyzer loop materials,

i.e., tubing

and

major

components

between

the

main

filter

and

the

analyzer, shall

be minimum

stainless

steel

grade

316, unless

the

application

necessitates

alternative

superìor materials.

Sample

isolating

valves

shall

be

provided

near

to the

analyzer,

outside any

housing

and accessible

from

grade

or

platform,

Each

sample isolating valve and

the

ends

of

each sample line

shall be clearly

labelled with

the stream identity and

analyzer

tag

number.

p.

Sample

lines

shall have

drains and

vents

as necessary.

Permanent

facilities

shall

be

provided

for

sample

lines

and

analyzer

flushing

when

sample

viscosity

is

greater

than 5OO

centistokes

at

SO.C

l122Fl,

and other

cases

as may

be

specified in

the

Contract, Double

block

and bleed

isolation

shall

be

provided

if leakage

of the

flushing

medium

would

of th

n

o

o

N l

2-OO56

significantly affect

the

measured

property

E

e.

{rt

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 147/163

@lff,Wx,Group

s

t

u

q.

Sample

flow

rate

through

each

loop,

bypass

and

analyzer

shall

be indicated

locally.

Sample

pressure

and

temperarure

if

required)

at

the

analyzer

inlet

shall also

be

indicated

locally.

r.

Liquified

gas

samples

shall

be

completely

vaporized

immediately

adjacent

to

the

process

line sample

probe,

with

samples

being

kept

above

their

dew

point.

Flue

gas

and

other vapour

samples

containing

a

large

proportion

of

steam

or

other

components

which

need

to

be

condensed

and removed

before

analysis

shall

be

given

special

consideration.

Lines

shall

not

be

heated

or

lagged except

for

personnel

protection)

and

shall

be

continuously

sloped

downwards

from

the

process

connection

to

the

condensate

removal

point.

Precautions

shall

be taken

to

prevent

damage

to

the analyzer

and

sampling

components

because

of abnormal plant

conditions,

B.g., reverse

flow

or

if

there

is

a danger

of

cross

contamination

of

process

streams.

V

Safeguards

shall

be

provided

to

protect

analysers

and

sampling

components

from

high

pressure,

temperature

or

vacuum

conditlons

resulting

from

malfunction

of

the

sampling

system.

Relief

valves

and

automatic

shutoff

systems

shall

be considered

to

protect

those

components

installed

in

a

system

which

has

a

limited

pressure

rat¡ng,

ê.9.,

sample

conditioning

vessels

or

glass-containing

components.

Where

shutoff

is

used,

an automatic

vent

shall

be

used

to

prevent

damage

due

to

pressure/vacuum

in

a

blocked in

system.

w.

Relief

valves

and vents

shafl

be

connected

to a

vent

or

drainage system as

requíred.

A

takeoff

point

shall

be

provided

on

each

sample

stream

to

enable

a

sample

check

to be

made

on the

analyzer.

This

poínt

shall

be

close

to

the

analyzer,

shall

be easily

accessible

and

arranged

so

that

drawing

off

a

sample

does

not impair

analyzer

operat¡on.

Facilities

shall

be

provided

for introducing

test

samples

into

the

analysers,

Gaseous

test

samples,

or

volatile,

toxic

or

otherwise

the housin

hazard.

X

dangerous

liquid

samples

shall

g.

lntroduction

of

a

test

sample

outside

Sheot

147

of

163

Dat6

15-9-94

|

Rev

pecificatlon

Number

015-JH-1903

N12-0056

v

be

use

a

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 148/163

@lffi:,wx,G,oup

z

Provisions for

introducing

a

test

containers

fitted with

relief

valves,

pressurisat¡on

facil¡t¡es.

sample

shall

include

pressure

gauges,

and

aa.

Solenoid

valves

shall

not be

used

directfy

in

sample lines,

and

shall

only be applied

for

switching instrument

air

or

nitrogen

to

pneumatically

operated valves.

ab.

All hazardous

samples

or

test

gases

shall

be

automatically

disconnected

by

operation

of these

valves

when

a

gas

emergency arises

in

the

analyzer

house.

20.5.3 Flow Rates

to

Analysers

The

total

amount

of

flammable

fluids flowing

to

the

analyzer

shall

be limited

by an excess

flow

valve which shall

be of the

self-closing

type

to

prevent

exceeding

the

limits

rnentioned

below.

b.

Maximum

flow

rate

of

flammable

gases

shall

not

exceed 20

normal

litres/hour.

c,

Liquid

flow

rate

shall

not

exceed the

maximum

required,

as

specified

by the

Approved

Manufacturer

of

the

analyzer

concerned.

d.

Flow

rates

exceeding

the above limits

require

the approval

of

the

Company.

20.5.4

Sample

Disposal

Systems

Samples

shall be

returned

back

into

the

process

stream

wherever

possible.

b.

Hydrocarbon gases

or

vapours

which

cannot

be

returned

to

the

process

shall

be discharged

to

a

flare

system

or

an

atmospheric

vent

at a

safe

height

which shall

be

independent

of any

process

vent;

due

regard

shall

be

given

to the

vent s

influence

on

the surrounding

electrical

area

classification.

Hydrocarbon

liquids

which

cannot

be

returned

to

the

process

shall be discharged

into a

plant

hydrocarbon

recovery

system

or

hydrocarbon

liquid

drain

pit.

20.5.5

Sample

Conditioning

The

removal

of

entrainments

in liquids

sh lows

Ct

a

a

c

,f

Sheet

148

of 163

Dato

15-9-94

l

Bsv

pecification

Number

o1

5-JH-1903

N

1

2-0056

a

trñ

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 149/163

@lffilffix,Group

Entrained

gases

shall

be

separated

by

passing

the

sample through

an

expansion

pot

wíth

a

low

level

líquid

takeoff

.

2.

Liquid

entrainments

i.e.,

oil

in

waterl

shall

be

coalesced

and separated

by

specific

gravity

differences.

3.

The

sample

point

shall

be

carefully

chosen

to eliminate

as

much

as

possible

solid

entra¡nment.

Further

entrainment

shall

be

eliminated

using

cyclone filters,

coalescing

of

liquid

droplets or by

filtration

of

solids.

4.

Chemical

means

and

drying

shall

be

used

to

remove

gases

or

water

vapour

which

are

either

not

required

or

could

affect

the

accuracy

of

the

analyzer.

These

methods

shall include

:

 a)

Liquid

or

solid

chemicals.

 b)

Desiccants

silica

gel

etc.).

 c)

Molecular

sieves.

{d)

Caustic

pellets.

 e)

Concentrated sulphuric

acid

5.

The

treating medium

shall

in

no way

affect

or influence

the

critical

properties

of

the

fluid

stream

to

be

analysed.

20.5,6 Field

Mount¡ng

of Analysers

Field

mounting

of

analysers shall

only

be

considered

under

the

following

conditions:

1. When

the

cost

of

an

analyzer house

is

disproportionate

to

the

advantages

gained.

lf

this

is

the

case,

the

requirements

of

the

analyzer shall

be

re-evaluated.

2. The

location

of

the

analyzer

away

from

the

tapping

would

result

in

an

unacceptable

time

lag.

3.

The

construction

and

installation

of

the

analyzer is

such

that

repair

and

rout¡ne

maintenance

can only

be

safely

effected

in

the workshops.

b. When

the

analyzer

is

to be

field

mounted,

ruction

and

mounting

shall

be fully

suitable for

ental

1

ó

DâTe

15-9-94

Sheet

149

of

163

l

Rev

pecilication

Number

o1 s-JH-1903

N

l

2-0056

conditions

and be

fully

protected

aga¡

rms

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 150/163

@W'gmx,GrouP

c

and

possible

vibration

from neighbouring

equipment.

The

black body temperature

under the direct

sun

exceeds 80 C

(1

76'

F).

Sun

shielding

shall

be

provided

so

that

the

instrument

does

not

rise above

the

lower

of the

instrument

design ternperature

or 7Oo C

(158 F).

Field-mounted

analysers

shall

be

installed individually

or

in

groups

close to

their sample

points

and

protected

by simple

shelters and sun

shields.

Where

an analyzer

sample contains

a

possible

source

of

toxic vapours,

the analyzer

shall

be

located in

a

separate

freely

ventilated

shelter.

d. Shelters shall

be

weatherproof

and

constructed

of

either

metal

sheet

on a steel frame

or

flame-retardant

glass

fibre.

Each

shelter shall be

fitted with

the

following:

1 . Electric

lighting.

2.

Windows.

3. Concrete

base

sloped

with

a

fall

of

1

in

30

to

a

drai

located

at

least

2 rn

{6

ft.) from

the shelter.

4,

Exit

points

at both

ends

sized

for

the

removal

of all

equipment. Doors,

where

fitted,

shall be outward

opening and provided

with

windows.

5.

The lower

edge

of all shelter

walls

shall be at least

18

in.

aboveground with

ventilation

provided

along the

uppermost

part

of

the shelter

roof

to

ensure

f

ree

circulation

of air within

the building.

Two or

more

analysers may

be

housed

ín

a

single shelter.

This

arrangement

is

subject to the

restrictions

for

allowable

transport

time, taking into

account the distance

to

sample

taps.

f.

Analysers

or

shelters

shall

not

be

located under

pipe

racks,

air coolers or

other

items

of

process

equipment.

g.

All

power

supplies

to

analysers

shall

have

a

field-mounted

isolating

switch,

h.

The

analyzer,

power

supply isolating

switch,

sample

takeoff

and

return

points

and sampling

system

components

shall be

readily

accessibÌe

from

grade

or

fixed

platforms.

i.

Approximate

sizes

and

locations

of all

analysers

/

shelters

shall

be shown on

the

plot

p

:./

e

Date

15-9-94

Sheet

150of

163

Rev

pecification

Number

01 5-JH

1903

N

1

2-O056

approval.

lan when

this

is

submitted

for

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 151/163

ØlW,Tmx,*oup

2O.5.7

Analysers

in Hazardous

Areas

a.

Wherever possible, analysers

shall

be

selected having

all

components

certified for

use

in

the

hazardous

area.

Where

this

is

not

possible,

and

with

Company

approval,

the

analyzer

can

be mounted

in a

purged

analyzer

house

and

be

connected

to

a

safety

system

such

that

all

power

to

the

analyzer is

cut

off

in

the

event of

a

failure

of

the

purge

system

or a

gas

emergency.

where

an analyzer

house

is not

provided,

or the

instrument

is

in

a

service

that requires

continuous

operation,

the

use

of

an

individually

purged

and

pressurized

enclosure

shall

be

offered for

Company

approval.

The

purge

control

unit

shall be

certified,

by

a recognized

European

Testing

Authority,

and

the complete

enclosure

and

its fitted

analyzer

and

components supplied as

a

system

by

the

purge

unit

Approved

Manufacturer.

b.

Analysers

which

handte

flammabfe

products

with¡n

non-

explosion-proof

housings

shall

not

only

be

pressurized

but

shatl

also

be

purged

by a

continuous flow

of

dilution

air

prevent

the

bu¡ldup

of

explosive

concentrations

in

the

even

of a

seal

failure.

c.

lf

inert

gas

is

used,

pressurìsation

only

is required

¡f

¡t is

at

a

higher

pressure

than

the

sample.

d.

Depending

on

the

area

classification,

the

following

purge

systems

shall

be considered.

ln

all cases,

the

purge

systems

shall

be

those

of

a specialist

proprietary

Approved

Manufacturer

and shall

be supplied

cornplete

with

interlocking

system,

timers,

alarms

etc.

and

be fully

certified

for

the

electrical

area

classífication,

and be

approved

by the

Company

before

detailed

desÍgn commences.

1,

Overpressure

only

-

shall

be

5-2b-mrn WG

(1/4-1

¡n.

WGI

with

at

least

ten

volume

changes

per

hour.

2.

Overpressure

with

alarm.

3.

Overpressure

with

interlock

4.

Overpressure

with low

flow

rate

interlock

The

flow

rate

shall

be

related

to

the maximum

flow rate

of

the

sample

system

to

cover

the

possibility

of

seal

failure.

A

purge

flow rate

of

four

times

the

maximum

sample

flow

rate

shall

be

regarded

as

a

safe

figure.

This

figure

may

be

reduced

depending

on

the

concentratio

flammable

Sheet

151

of

163

Date

15-9.94

Rev

pecification

Number

01s-JH-1903

N12-OOs6

e

gas

necessary

to

remain

below

the

lo

ir.

,r/

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 152/163

@[ff'';ffix,GrouP

t, The

purge

medium

shall

in

general

be

dry

instrument

air.

Nitrogen

shall

be used when the

lower

explosive

limit

is

difficult

to

reach

or the

location

is remote

and

there

is

no

instrument

air supply.

g.

Purge

systems

shall be

interlocked with all

analyzer

power

points

so

that on

failure

of the

purge,

the

power points

are

switched off.

h.

Purge

systems

shall be alarmed

for

low

pressures

in

all

cases.

High-purge

pressure

alarm

and

low-pressure

shutdown shall be considered

per

installation.

i. ln

the

event

of a shutdown of the analyzer

system

due to

purge

failure,

the

system shall

be

interlocked such

that

the

analysers

cannot be

switched on until

at

least

five volume

changes have laken

place.

20.5.8

Analyzer House

An

analyzer house

shall be

provided

where it is feasible

to

install

several analysers in

one

location,

and

where

sampling stream

lag

time

is

not

a

major

consideration

or can be accommodated.

The

type of analyzer house required

shall be

indicated in

the Contract

documents:

a.

Masonry

Construction

The

analyzer house

shall be

of

solidly construcled

design

able

to

w¡thstand

blast

forces

from inside

or

outs¡de.

lnternal

blast relief

provisions

shall

be

included

in the

design.

The

house

shall be

equipped

with self-closing

doors

with

closure

alarm

switches.

2.

The

analyzer house

shall be

fitted

with

a

dual

(1OQø/o

redundant)

air

purging

/cooling

system

to

maintain

the

temperature

between 15 and 3O C

(59

and

86'F),

lighting

at

250

lux

mínimum,

Ex'd'

power

sockets

and

power

distribution

and all facilities and

safety

equipment

normal

for

an operator

work

area. Sinks

and sluices

shall

be

provided.

3. The

house

shall be fitted

with

f¡re

and

flammable

gas

detectors

connected

to

the

plant-wide

system.

4. The

space allocation

shall

be

at least

1-m

{3-ft.}

wall

1

space and 2.5

m3

(88

ft3) volume

3O7o

spare allocation for

future

ex

Sheot

152of

163

Date

15-9-94

Rev

pecification Number

01s-JH-1903

N

r

2-0056

for

analyzer, with

rf'

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 153/163

@l|Jß::x;:,*-up

6

5.

wherever

possible,

an

analyzer

house

shall

be

located

ìn

a

non-hazardous

area

or

if

this

is

not

feasible,

at

worst

inaZone2area.

construction

Drawings

and

materíafs

specifications

for

the

analyzer

house

shall

be

approved

by

the

Company.

The

Drawings

shall

show

the

locations

of

analysers,

sample

conditionÍng

systems, laboratory

sampte

points,

calibration

sarnple

contaíners, gas

cylinders

and

drains.

Note

: The

sample lines

and

the

sample

corrditioning

system

will

probably

create

a

Zone

2

area

around

the

analyzer

house.

All

test

sample

bottles

and

conditioning

equipment

wherever

possible

shall

be

mounted

in

racki

outside

rhe

analyzer

house

in

a covered,

vented

gallery.

All

hazardous

sample

and

test lines

into

the

build¡ng

shall

have

an

automatic

and

a

manual

isolation

valve

orts¡oe

the

building.

8.

The

location

of the

analyzer

house

shalr

be

as

close

a

practicable

to the

sample

takeoff

points

of

the

releva

analysers,

in

order

to

minimise

sample

transport

time

lag

a_nd

cooling

of

the

sample

to low

ambient

temperature.

The location

shall

also

be

free from

spillage

of

water

and

process

liquids.

9.

The

analyzer

house

shall

be

ventirated

with

air

to keep

out

flammable

and

toxíc

gases,

and

any leakage

of

flammable

gases

and/or

vapours

that

may

occur

inside

the house

shall

be

diluted

to

a

safe

level.

10. The

flow

of

air shall

be

sufficient

ro:

 a).

Dilute

escaping

vapours

resulting

from

the

failure

of

any

sample

line

to

less

than

2Oo/o

of

the LEL.

{b}.

Maintain

the

pressure

inside

the

anaryzer

house

at

0.25

mbarg

1/10-in.WG)

above

that

of

rhe outside

atmosphere,

to

prevent

ingress

of

that

atmosphere.

1

1

.

The

ventilation

system

shall

be capable

of

at

least

12

volume

changes

per

hour

to

ensure

adequate

dilution

of

the

internal

atmosphere.

12.

The

required

air

flow

rate

shall

be

c

r

each

analyzer

house

based

on

the

above

7

Sheet

153

of 163

Date

1

5-9-94

Rev

pecification

Number

01

5-JH-

l

903

N r

2-0056

be

submitted

to

the

Company

for

a

shall

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 154/163

@ïr|/,:W,GrouP

13.

Air intake

to the

ventilation

system shall be

taken

through

a stack

provided

with

a

rain

hood

and,

wherever

necessary,

a

sand

filter.

14. The

air

shall

be drawn

from

a

non-hazardous

area,

and

the intake

duct and

diameter

should be

sized

so

as to

limit

the

air

velocity

inside

the

ducting

to a

maximum

of

I

m/second

(26

ftlsecond).

 15.

Gas detectors

shall be

provided

within

the

ventilation

ducts to detect

the

presence

of

any

airborne

flammable

gases.

16.

Should

the

analyzer house

ventilation

system

fail or

be

shut

down due

to

gas

detected

in

the

inlet

duct,

protective

measures

shall

be

taken

against

the

potentially

hazardous

atmosphere caused by

possible

leakages

both

inside

and

outside

the house,

All

analysers

which

cannot

be

switched

off

in

such

circumstances

shall

be

engineered for

operation

in

a

Zone

1

environment.

17.

Upon

failure

of

the

vent¡lat¡on

system

or

failure

of a

door

to close

within

a

preset

time,

an audible

and

visual

alarm

shall

be initiated in

the

analyzer

building

and

in

rhe

control

room.

18. When

flammable

gas

is detected in

the

ventilation

air

inlet

ducts,

the

ventilation

system shall

be

switched

off

and isolated.

19.

When

flammable

gas

is

detected

inside

the analyzer

house

but not

at

the

inlet,

the

ventilat¡on

system

shall

be

left

running,

but all

non-certified

equipment

shall be

switched

off and isolated.

20, After

a

failure

of

the

ventilat¡on

system, non-explosion

proof

equiprnent can

only

be

switched

on

when:

(a).

The

gas

detected

in the

house

is

below 2Oo/o

of the

L.E.L

(b).

The ventilation

system

has

been

running

for

a

sufficient length

of time

for

at

least

five air

volume

changes.

Sheet

 l

54 of

163

Date

15-9-94

Rev

pecification

Number

015

JH-1903

N

Ì

2-00s6

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 155/163

I

@l|if;y,m;:,*oup

b,

Steel

Framed

Building

with

Cladding

Enclosed

analyzer houses

constructed

of

steel framing

and

having

insulated

metal

cladding

shall

incorporate

all

the

features

of the

masonry-built

houses,

including

the

provisions

for

air-conditioning,

purging,

pressurisation

and

gas

detection.

c

Glass-Reinforced

Polyester

(GRP)

Construction

1

Enclosed

analyzer

houses

of

GRP

or

simllar

lightweight

materials

may

be used

for

a

limited

number

of

analysers.

The

houses

shall be installed

on

a

tiled

concrete

base

and shall

include

all the features

of the

masonry

analyzer

house

including

the

provisions

for

air

conditìoning,

purging, pressurisation

and

gas

detection.

2.

The

construction

shall

not

be

rated

as blast

resistant.

Windows

may

be

installed

as

for

the

vent¡tated

field

analyzer

shelters.

3.

Sinks and

sluíces

may

be omitted

if

not

required

for

the

installed

analysers.

A

sloping

floor

piped

to

an

external

drain

shall be installed.

4.

The analysers

shall be installed on floor-mounted

frames

and

shall not be

supported

from

the

analyzer

house

walls.

5. A

sun shield shall be installed

to

protect

the

GRP

from

direct

exposure

to the

sun.

20.6 lnstallation

Notes

Analysers

and

related

equipment

shall

be

installed

in

accordance

with

the

Engineering

Group

Specification

entitled

lnstrument

lnstallation

(Number

O1s-JH-19O8),

as

modified

for the

special

requirements

of

process

analysis equipment.

20.7

Pe f:lqtm?nç.e-åequírements

20.7.1

Ouality

Control

(OC)

QC shall

be as detailed

in

the

Contract.

This section

states

the minimum

additional

requírements

related

to

analysis

instruments

only

and shall

not

in

any

way

replace

or

reduce

Date

15-9-94

Sheet

1 55

of

163

Rev

pecificatíon

Number

01 5-JH-

1

903

N

1

2-0056

a

the

general

QA/OC requirements

r/t

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 156/163

b, The test and inspection

plan

shall

include

the

following

items

in addition

to

those

found

necessary

by the Approved

Manufacturer

to

ensure

the

quality

of the

product:

A

check

of

the

instrument

and all

accessories

in

accordance

with

this specification

and the data

sheets

and Drawings.

2. Full works

calibration and issue

of test

and calibration

cert¡ficate.

3.

A

check

on

the

nameplate

data

ín

accordance with

this

specification

and the

data sheets and

Drawings.

4. A

check

on the

painting

and

protection

and

general

suitability

for

the

environment.

5. A check

on the tagg¡ng

in

accordance

with

this

specification

and

the

data sheets.

1

6.

Additional

checks

commensurate

with

the

instrument

related

to similar

instruments

specification,

e.9..

welding,

NDT

etc.

type

of

in

this

Á

ffii

\

20.7.2

Documentation

The

following

data

shafl be available

at final

inspection:

a. Completed test and inspection

plan.

b.

lnstrument

test

and

calibration

certificate.

c. Hazardous

area

cert¡ficates.

d. Other documents commensurate

with

the type

of

instrument

related

to similar

instruments

in

this specification.

20.8

Nameplate

Data

20.8.1

General

information

for

product¡on

of the nameplate

data is

given

in

sect¡on

4.7 of

this specification.

20.8.2

ln

addition,

the

analyzer

systems

as a

whole

shall

be

fitted with

clear, dual-language

labels

at

all

isolation

valves,

test

points,

indicators,

test

panels,

flammable

gas

detector

test

points

etc.

Labels

outs¡de

shall be

sta¡nless

steel.

lnside

the

analyzer

house,

laminate

or similar

labels,

white with

black

legends

shall

be used,

provide

betwee

service

d

adeq

uate allowance

is

made for

d

rentia

n

the

label

and

panel

materials

I expansion

cracking in

Date

15-9-94

Sheet

156

of

163

Rev

pecification Number

01s-JH-1903

@10|^, :,|:çxx,G louP

Nr

2-0056

,/

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 157/163

Sheet

157

of

163

Date

15-9-94

Rev

pecification

Number

015-JH-1903

@ftff,;yHX,G,oup

21.O

LOCAL

PANELS

AND

GAUGE

BOARDS

21.1

Scope

of

Local

Panel

and

Gauge Board

Selection

This

section covers

the

design

and

application

of

all

local

panels

and

gauge

boards

used

for

assisting field

operational control.

21.2

Lqca ,PAn.elS_Bnd_GaU.ge

Boards

Tvoe

and

Selecrion

21.2.1

Centralized

Control

control

and

monitoring

shall wherever

possible

be

via

the control

room

DCS

and its

operator. The

use of

local

panels

shall

be

minimised

within

the

constraints

of

safe, economical

control

of

the

Facility.

21.2.2 Local

Panels

Where

an equipment

package

requires

to be

started/stopped

in

the

field

and/or

to

have important

operating

status/data

relayed

to

the

field from

the ESD/DCS

systems,

a

local

panel

shall

be

installed

adjacent

to the

equipment,

readily

accessible

from

grade

or

a fixed

platform.

Such

panels

shall

not

contain logic

or

any components

other than

terminals,

lamps and

pushbuttons.

21.2.3

Special

Panels

By

agreement

with

the Company,

special-purpose

local

panels

can

be

supplied.

Examples

are:

Where

the

f¡eld

repeat

and

control

interface

is

complex,

a

fíeld

hardened

VDU

operator

stat¡on may

be

supplied,

with

a

redundant

data

lìnk

to the

main DCS

system. The

station

shall in

all

respects

comply

with

the

requirements

for

the

hazardous

area

certification

and

ingress

protection,

and

be

mounted

in

a room

maintained

under environmental

conditions

suitable

for

the equipment

contained.

b, Where

a

standard

piece

of

equipment

of

proven

design

and

performance

is

proposed,

subject

to Company

approval,

discrete

electronic

components

may

be

contained

within

the

cert¡fied

enclosure.

Such

equipment

shall

only

be accepted

when

its

use

is intermittent

and maintenance

can be

conducted

without

plant

shutdown.

21.2.4

Gauge

Boards

a

Where

a number

of

gauges

are

in

collected

together

on a

clearly

labe

they

shall

be

to

ass¡st

the

N',t

2-0056

easy,

unambiguous

reading

of

the

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 158/163

@W ;z*x;:,GrouP

21.2.5

Field

Enclosures

Where

conditions dictate

that the

amplifier

or

transducer

for

a

particular

piece

of

equipment requires

to

be

field

mounted

close

to

the tapping

points,

the Approved

Manufacturer

shall

provide

a

local

enclosure. lt is

the

Contractor s

responsibility

to specify

the

equipment

directly

suitable

for

the

environment

and

hazardous

area,

or

to

provide

such

additional

protection

as is necessary.

21,2.6

Miscellaneous

Panels

Panels

and

boards

shall

also

be

provided

to

assist

in

crarifying

plant

areas

for

maintenance

purposes,

o.g.,

sample

points

collected

together,

gas

injection

points

for

detector

testing,

solenoid

valve

reset

groupings

for

related

services

in

tight

locations

etc.

21.3

Sizino

Requírements

21.3.1

Layout

for

Operator Access

Local

panels

shall

be

the

minimum

size

commensurate

with

clear

and

adequate

spacing

of

the

¡nstruments

and

associated

b¡-

lingual

labetling

(English

and Arabic).

lnstruments

to

be

viewed

by

the

operator

shatl be

between

1.4

and 1.6

m

(4t1,

and

51lo

ft.)

from

grade

or

a

fixed

platform.

Pushbuttons

shall

be between

1.0

and

1.5 m

(3

and

5

ft.)

from

the

same levels.

21.3.2

Terminations

a.

ltems

requiring

termination,

maintenance

etc.

such as

solenoid valves

shall

be

not less

than 3OO mm

(12

in.)

and

not

more

than 1.8 .

{6

ft.)

above

the

standing

surface.

b.

Terminal

boxes

shall

be

placed

with the

bottom

entry

gland

at

least

3OO rnm

(12

in.)

above

the

platform

level,

or

a

sufficient

distance

above

grade

to

rnanipulate

lead-sheathed

multicore

cables.

21.4

Construction Reouirements

21.4.1

General

a

Local

panels

shall

be

constructed

as

free-standing, pre-wired

assemblies.

They

shall

consist

of one

or

more

certified

junction

boxes

with

certified

lamps

and

pushbuttons

installed

in

the

front

face.

They

shall

be

complete

with

certified

junction

box

for

connection

of

main

plant

ng.

The lamps

and

pushbuttons

shall

be

labelled

number and

service,

in

EnglÍsh

and

h

full

tag

Sheet

158

ol 163

Dato

15-9-94

Rev

pecification

Number

o15-JH-1903

N12-0056

ally

with

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 159/163

Shoet

159

of

163

Date

1

5-9-94

Rev

pecification

Number

01

5-JH,1

903

@10|.,'g Iffi,Group

tag

number

only.

For

Zone

1 or

2

use,

the

junction

boxes

shall be

Ex'e',

the

pushbuttons

Ex'i'

and the lamps

Ex'd'

or

Ex's',

b.

The

junction

boxes

shall conform

to

the

detaíls

gíven

in

the

Engineering

Group

Specification

entitled

lnstrument

lnstallation

(Number

01

5-JH-1

9O8).

c.

Panels

having

a large number

of

lamps/buttons

may

use

a

fabricated

carcase

with

the

junction

boxes mounted

inside

and

connected

by

flying

lead

to

certif¡ed

lamp/pushbutton

units

on

the

front

face,

The

hazardous

area

within

the

enclosure

shall

be

rated

one zone

higher

than

the

surrounding

area,

unless

adequate ventilation

can

be

ensured.

21.4.2

Gauge

Boards

Gauge

boards

shall

be

constructed

as

free

standing.

The front

facing

shall be

5-mm

(3/16-in.)

plate,

suirably

plated

or

painred

for

the

service

conditions.

The

gauges

and isolating

valves

shall

be

pre-assembled

and

piped

to

bulkhead or

termination fittings.

The

method

of

mounting

gauges

shall not infringe

upon

the

blow-out

integrity.

The

gauges

shall be

labeiled

with fuil

rag

number

and

the

service,

in

English and

Arabic. All installation

materials, including

tray

work, shall

be

as

specified

in

the

Engineering

Group

speclfication

entitled

lnstrument

lnstallation

(Number

015-JH-1908).

21.4.3

Field

Enclosures

Local

transducer/amplifying

stations

will

normally

be supplied

as

cert¡f¡ed weatherproof

enclosures

by

the

Approved

Manufacturer

and installed

by

the

contractor

onto

a

panel

constructed

similar

to a

gauge

board.

Where

the equipment

is

not

to

protection

standard lP65

or

better, a secondary

enclosure

may be

provided;

however,

since

the hazardous

area

classification

will increase

to

the

next

zone,

the

Contractor

shall

ensure

that the

equipment

certification

is

suitable.

Other

techniques,

such

as

purged

and

pressurized

panels,

may

be adopted

subject to

Company

approval.

21.4.4

Framework

The

supporting

framework

shalt

be

provided

w¡th

drilled

base

feet

of

ample

proport¡ons

to support

the

weight

and wind

forces,

without

causing

trip

points

on

the

grade

or

platform

area

where

the

panel

or board is installed.

Lifting

points

s

provided

as

necessary.

Where

removable

lifting

points

blanking

N

12-0056

bolts and

washers

shall

be

fitted

n.

The

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 160/163

Øffi\ït:xx,Group

framework

shall

be

manufactured

of robust

angles

and sections

welded

together,

galvanised

after manufacture

and

after

drilling

of

all

holes.

21.4.5 Visibility

and Sun

Screens

Measures

shall

be

adopted

to ensure

that

the

panel

lamps,

indicators

etc.

can

be

easily

read

under

any

expected

light

conditions.

ln most

external

locations,

side enclosures

and

overhead

deflectors

will

be

required

in

addition

to

mounting

the

panels

in

advantageous

positions,

care shall

be taken

to

ensure

that

the

use

of such

enclosing

does

not

increase

the

hazardous

area

classification

above

the

rat¡ng

of

the equipment.

21.4.6

Lamp

Test

All

panels

having

lamps

shall

also include

a

lamp

test

push-

button which

shall communicate

with

the

logic

system

and

thus

activate

all unlit

lamps

when

depressed.

21.4.7

Fabrication

and

Finishing

a

Fabricated

cubicles,

side

panels

etc. shall

be

of

minimu

mm

(3/32-in.)

plate

with

fotded

edges

and

weld

construction.

They

shall be

painted

in

accordance

with

th

e

Engineering

Group

Specification

entitled Shop

and

Field

Painting

(Number

O1s-XH-1OO5).

Ventilated

panels

shall

have

high

level louvres

with

mesh

screens.

Opening

doors

shall

be

supplied with

robust

sta¡nless

steel

hinges

and T-key

door

fastening

system. Door locks

shall

be

f¡fied

only

where

agreed

to as

specifically

required

by the

Company.

b. All

entries shall

be

from

the

bottom,

preferably

direct

into

the

junction

boxes via

an

open

bottom

so

that

free

ventilat¡on

is

possible.

For

grade-mounted panels,

a

closed

bottom is

required

to

prevent

ingress

of

wind

blown

materials.

ln

this case,

the cable

shall enter

the

panel

via

a

cable

stopper gland

(without

stripping

of

the

cable

sheath)

mounted

in

the

base

gland

plate

and

then

be

terminated

in

the

junction

box.

ln

these cases,

an adequate ventilation

system

is required

to

prevent

an

increase

in

the

hazardous

area

classification.

21.4.8

Local

lndicators

Local

elect

clarity

of

conditions,

approval.

ronic indicators

shall be

digital lS

type

when

the

the

reading

can

be ensured

u

lndicating

dial

type may

be

used

s

nder

the sunlight

Sheet

160

of

163

Dale

15-9-94

Rev

pecification

Number

015-JH-1903

N12-0056

ub

to

Company

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 161/163

Sheei

161

of

163

Date

15-9-94

Bev

pecification

Number

01s-JH-1S03

@lff

T ngx,Group

21.4.9

Terminations

Terminations,

wiring

etc.

w¡thin

the

junction

boxes

shall

be

ln

accordance

with

the

Engineering

Group

Specifícation

entitled

  lnstrument

lnstallation

(Number

015-JH-19081,

including

glanding,

numbering,

earthing

etc.

The minimum

cable core

size

shall be

1.5 mm2.

21.4.10

Earthing

All

panels/cubicles

shall have

a fulty

wired

earthing

system

connecting

all metal

components

via

green/yellow

earth

conductors

(of

minimum

6

mmz)

back

to

one

main

plant

earth

boss,

with 1O-mm

(3/8-in.)

brass earth

stud, 30-mm

(13/16-in.)

projection

and

two

brass

nuts

and washers.

21.4.1 1

Sunshield

All

panels

and

gauge

boards

require

an

overhead

sun

shield

of

such

proportions

and

materials

that the temperature

of

the

panel

does not rise

above 7O'C

{158 F)

due to

direct

sun effects or re-

radiation.

21.5

lnstallation Notes

21.5.1

Visibility

Control

panels

shall

be

¡nstalled

in

the truly

vertical

position.

They

shall

be

installed

in the

best

position

to

make

use

of

ambient

light

while

minimising

the effect of

glare,

and

shall

be

adequately lit for

night

use by

general

or specific illuminators.

The

panel

instruments, lights

and

annunciators

shall

be clearly

visible

to the

operator

under

all

possible

lighting conditions.

The

Contractor

shall

make

whatever

provisions

are

necessary

to

achieve

this condition

to

company satisfact¡on.

21.5.2

Choice of Location

Panels

shall be

mounted

as

far

as

possible

from

sources

of

harmful matter

and vibratÍon.

21.5.3 Access

The

space in

front

of

the

panel

shall

be

an unobstructed

passageway

of at

least

150O mm

(5

ft.) A

minímum

distance

of

10OO

mrn

(31/4

ft.)

shall

be

provided

for

rear

access

when

required.

All visual

instruments

shall be within

the

range

1.4

to

1.6

m

1411,

to 51i4 ft.)

and operator accessible instruments

1.0

N

l2-0056

m

to

1,5 m

(3

to 5 ft.) from

the standing

platfo

vel.

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 162/163

@tír,, ;y,Wx,G loup

21.6

Performance

Requirementq

21.6.1

Ouality Control

(OC)

a.

OC

shall

be

as

detailed

in

the

Contract.

This

section

states

the

minimum additional

requirements

related

to

local

panels

and

gauge

boards

only and

shall

not

in

any

way replace

or

reduce

the

general

OA/OC requirernents.

b.

The

test

and

inspection

plan

shall

include

the

following

items

in

addition

to those

found

necessary

by

the Approved

Manufacturer to ensure

the

quality

of the

product:

A

check

of the

dimensions

of

the

finÍshed items

against

the

Drawings supplied

for

the

Contract and

approved

by

the

Company.

2.

A

check

of

the

paneUcubicle

and all accessories in

accordance

with

this specification

and

the

data

sheets

and

Drawings,

3.

Futl

point-to-point,

functional

and

earth resistan

testing

of the

panel/cubicle

in

accordance t

specification, the

Approved

Manufacturer s

additional

OA/OC

procedures

and

the

approved

test

and

inspection

plan,

4,

A check on the

nameplate

data

in

accordance

with

this

specification and

the

data

sheets and

Drawings.

A

check

on the

painting

and

protection

and

general

suitability

for

the

environment.

6. A check on the tagging

in

accordance

with

this

specification

and

the

data

sheets.

21.6.2

Testing

LampiPushbutton

panels

shall

be

tested

by

applying

simulated

signals

and

loads

at

the

junction

box term¡nals.

b. Gauge

boards

shall be tested

with

instrument

quality

air

up

to the

rating

of the

instrument

or

the

air

line, whíchever is

lower.

A soap and

water or bubble

charnber

test

shall

confirm the tightness

of the

joints.

c

Cubicles contain¡ng

the Approved

Manufacturer s

amplifying

equipmertt

shall be

tested

in

simulated

1

5

a

Sheet

162of

163

Dato

15-9-94

Rev

pecification Number

o1s-JH-1903

N12-0056

sensor and

receiving

equipment

con

tions

w¡th

the

7/25/2019 015-JH-1903

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/015-jh-1903 163/163

Sheet

163

of 163

Date

15-9-94

Rev

pecification

Number

015-JH-1903

@W,*g*xx,Group

21.6.3 Documentation

.All

the

certifícation

for

each cubicle/panel

shall be coilated

in

a

Data Book

which

shall

be available

at

final inspection.

The

book

shall

include

as

a minimum:

a.

Completed

test

and

inspection

plan.

b.

Weld

procedures

for

structural

welds,

c.

Leak

test

certificates,

d.

Hazardous

ârea

certificates.

e.

As-built Drawings as

necessary.

21.7 Nameolate

Data

21 .7.1

General information

for

production

of the nameplate

data

is

given

in

section 4.7

of this specification.

21.7.2 The

proposed

title

for

service

of

panel

front instruments

sh

be submitted

to

the

Company for approval.